The Project Gutenberg Etext of Lost in the Fog, by James De Mille
Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the
copyright laws for your country before distributing this or any other
Project Gutenberg file.
We encourage you to keep this file, exactly as it is, on your
own disk, thereby keeping an electronic path open for future
readers. Please do not remove this.
This header should be the first thing seen when anyone starts to
view the etext. Do not change or edit it without written permission.
The words are carefully chosen to provide users with the
information they need to understand what they may and may not
do with the etext.
**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts**
**Etexts Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971**
*****These Etexts Are Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!*****
Information on contacting Project Gutenberg to get etexts, and
further information, is included below. We need your donations.
The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a 501(c)(3)
organization with EIN [Employee Identification Number] 64-6221541
Title: Lost in the Fog
Author: James De Mille
Release Date: October, 2003 [Etext# 4506]
[Yes, we are more than one year ahead of schedule]
[This file was first posted on January 27, 2002]
Edition: 10
Language: English
Character set encoding: ASCII
The Project Gutenberg Etext of Lost in the Fog, by James De Mille
******This file should be named lstfg10.txt or lstfg10.zip******
Corrected EDITIONS of our etexts get a new NUMBER, lstfg11.txt
VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, lstfg10a.txt
Edited by Charles Aldarondo Aldarondo@yahoo.com
Project Gutenberg Etexts are often created from several printed
editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the US
unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we usually do not
keep etexts in compliance with any particular paper edition.
We are now trying to release all our etexts one year in advance
of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing.
Please be encouraged to tell us about any error or corrections,
even years after the official publication date.
Please note neither this listing nor its contents are final til
midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement.
The official release date of all Project Gutenberg Etexts is at
Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A
preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment
and editing by those who wish to do so.
Most people start at our sites at:
http://gutenberg.net or
http://promo.net/pg
These Web sites include award-winning information about Project
Gutenberg, including how to donate, how to help produce our new
etexts, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter (free!).
Those of you who want to download any Etext before announcement
can get to them as follows, and just download by date. This is
also a good way to get them instantly upon announcement, as the
indexes our cataloguers produce obviously take a while after an
announcement goes out in the Project Gutenberg Newsletter.
http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext03 or
ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext03
Or /etext02, 01, 00, 99, 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90
Just search by the first five letters of the filename you want,
as it appears in our Newsletters.
Information about Project Gutenberg (one page)
We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The
time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours
to get any etext selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright
searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. Our
projected audience is one hundred million readers. If the value
per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2
million dollars per hour in 2001 as we release over 50 new Etext
files per month, or 500 more Etexts in 2000 for a total of 4000+
If they reach just 1-2% of the world's population then the total
should reach over 300 billion Etexts given away by year's end.
The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away One Trillion Etext
Files by December 31, 2001. [10,000 x 100,000,000 = 1 Trillion]
This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers,
which is only about 4% of the present number of computer users.
At our revised rates of production, we will reach only one-third
of that goal by the end of 2001, or about 4,000 Etexts. We need
funding, as well as continued efforts by volunteers, to maintain
or increase our production and reach our goals.
The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been created
to secure a future for Project Gutenberg into the next millennium.
We need your donations more than ever!
As of January, 2002, contributions are being solicited from people
and organizations in: Alabama, Alaska, Arkansas, Connecticut, Delaware,
Florida, Georgia, Idaho, Illinois, Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky,
Louisiana, Maine, Michigan, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada, New
Jersey, New Mexico, New York, North Carolina, Oklahoma, Oregon,
Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, South Dakota, Tennessee,
Texas, Utah, Vermont, Virginia, Washington, West Virginia, Wisconsin,
and Wyoming.
*In Progress
We have filed in about 45 states now, but these are the only ones
that have responded.
As the requirements for other states are met, additions to this list
will be made and fund raising will begin in the additional states.
Please feel free to ask to check the status of your state.
In answer to various questions we have received on this:
We are constantly working on finishing the paperwork to legally
request donations in all 50 states. If your state is not listed and
you would like to know if we have added it since the list you have,
just ask.
While we cannot solicit donations from people in states where we are
not yet registered, we know of no prohibition against accepting
donations from donors in these states who approach us with an offer to
donate.
International donations are accepted, but we don't know ANYTHING about
how to make them tax-deductible, or even if they CAN be made
deductible, and don't have the staff to handle it even if there are
ways.
All donations should be made to:
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
PMB 113
1739 University Ave.
Oxford, MS 38655-4109
Contact us if you want to arrange for a wire transfer or payment
method other than by check or money order.
The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been approved by
the US Internal Revenue Service as a 501(c)(3) organization with EIN
[Employee Identification Number] 64-622154. Donations are
tax-deductible to the maximum extent permitted by law. As fundraising
requirements for other states are met, additions to this list will be
made and fundraising will begin in the additional states.
We need your donations more than ever!
You can get up to date donation information at:
http://www.gutenberg.net/donation.html
***
If you can't reach Project Gutenberg,
you can always email directly to:
Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com>
Prof. Hart will answer or forward your message.
We would prefer to send you information by email.
**The Legal Small Print**
(Three Pages)
***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN ETEXTS**START***
Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers.
They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with
your copy of this etext, even if you got it for free from
someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our
fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement
disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how
you may distribute copies of this etext if you want to.
*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS ETEXT
By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm
etext, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept
this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive
a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this etext by
sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person
you got it from. If you received this etext on a physical
medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request.
ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM ETEXTS
This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm etext, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm etexts,
is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor Michael S. Hart
through the Project Gutenberg Association (the "Project").
Among other things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright
on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and
distribute it in the United States without permission and
without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth
below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this etext
under the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark.
Please do not use the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark to market
any commercial products without permission.
To create these etexts, the Project expends considerable
efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain
works. Despite these efforts, the Project's etexts and any
medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other
things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or
corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged
disk or other etext medium, a computer virus, or computer
codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment.
LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES
But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below,
[1] Michael Hart and the Foundation (and any other party you may
receive this etext from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm etext) disclaims
all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including
legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR
UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE
OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
If you discover a Defect in this etext within 90 days of
receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any)
you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that
time to the person you received it from. If you received it
on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and
such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement
copy. If you received it electronically, such person may
choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to
receive it electronically.
THIS ETEXT IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS
TO THE ETEXT OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or
the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the
above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you
may have other legal rights.
INDEMNITY
You will indemnify and hold Michael Hart, the Foundation,
and its trustees and agents, and any volunteers associated
with the production and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm
texts harmless, from all liability, cost and expense, including
legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the
following that you do or cause: [1] distribution of this etext,
[2] alteration, modification, or addition to the etext,
or [3] any Defect.
DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm"
You may distribute copies of this etext electronically, or by
disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this
"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg,
or:
[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this
requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the
etext or this "small print!" statement. You may however,
if you wish, distribute this etext in machine readable
binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form,
including any form resulting from conversion by word
processing or hypertext software, but only so long as
*EITHER*:
[*] The etext, when displayed, is clearly readable, and
does *not* contain characters other than those
intended by the author of the work, although tilde
(~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may
be used to convey punctuation intended by the
author, and additional characters may be used to
indicate hypertext links; OR
[*] The etext may be readily converted by the reader at
no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent
form by the program that displays the etext (as is
the case, for instance, with most word processors);
OR
[*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at
no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the
etext in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC
or other equivalent proprietary form).
[2] Honor the etext refund and replacement provisions of this
"Small Print!" statement.
[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Foundation of 20% of the
gross profits you derive calculated using the method you
already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you
don't derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are
payable to "Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation"
the 60 days following each date you prepare (or were
legally required to prepare) your annual (or equivalent
periodic) tax return. Please contact us beforehand to
let us know your plans and to work out the details.
WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO?
Project Gutenberg is dedicated to increasing the number of
public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed
in machine readable form.
The Project gratefully accepts contributions of money, time,
public domain materials, or royalty free copyright licenses.
Money should be paid to the:
"Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
If you are interested in contributing scanning equipment or
software or other items, please contact Michael Hart at:
hart@pobox.com
[Portions of this header are copyright (C) 2001 by Michael S. Hart
and may be reprinted only when these Etexts are free of all fees.]
[Project Gutenberg is a TradeMark and may not be used in any sales
of Project Gutenberg Etexts or other materials be they hardware or
software or any other related product without express permission.]
*END THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN ETEXTS*Ver.10/04/01*END*
Edited by Charles Aldarondo Aldarondo@yahoo.com
LOST IN THE FOG
by
JAMES DE MILLE
1870
I.
Old Acquaintances gather around old Scenes.--Antelope, ahoy!--How
are you, Solomon?--Round-about Plan of a round about Voyage.--The
Doctor warns, rebukes, and remonstrates, but, alas! in vain.--It
must be done.--Beginning of a highly eventful Voyage.
It was a beautiful morning, in the month of July, when a crowd of
boys assembled on the wharf of Grand Pre. The tide was high, the
turbid waters of Mud Creek flowed around, a fresh breeze blew, and
if any craft was going to sea she could not have found a better
time. The crowd consisted chiefly of boys, though a few men were
mingled with them. These boys were from Grand Pre School, and are
all old acquaintances. There was the stalwart frame of Bruce, the
Roman face of Arthur, the bright eyes of Bart, the slender frame of
Phil, and the earnest glance of Tom. There, too, was Pat's merry
smile, and the stolid look of Bogud, and the meditative solemnity
of Jiggins, not to speak of others whose names need not be
mentioned. Amid the crowd the face of Captain Corbet was
conspicuous, and the dark visage of Solomon, while that of the
mate was distinguishable in the distance. To all these the good
schooner Antelope formed the centre of attraction, and also of
action. It was on board of her that the chief bustle took place,
and towards her that all eyes were turned.
The good schooner Antelope had made several voyages during the past
few months, and now presented herself to the eye of the spectator
not much changed from her former self. A fine fresh coat of coal
tar had but recently ornamented her fair exterior, while a coat of
whitewash inside the hold had done much to drive away the odor of
the fragrant potato. Rigging and sails had been repaired as well
as circumstances would permit, and in the opinion of her gallant
captain she was eminently seaworthy.
On the present occasion things bore the appearance of a voyage.
Trunks were passed on board and put below, together with coats,
cloaks, bedding, and baskets of provisions. The deck was strewn
about with the multifarious requisites of a ship's company. The
Antelope, at that time, seemed in part an emigrant vessel, with a
dash of the yacht and the coasting schooner.
In the midst of all this, two gentlemen worked their way through
the crowd to the edge of the wharf.
"Well, boys," said one, "well, captain, what's the meaning of all
this?"
Captain Corbet started at this, and looked up from a desperate
effort to secure the end of one of the sails.
"Why, Dr. Porter!" said he; "why, doctor!--how d'ye do?--and Mr.
Long, too!--why, railly!"
The boys also stopped their work, and looked towards their teachers
with a little uneasiness.
"What's all this?" said Dr. Porter, looking around with a smile;
"are you getting up another expedition?"
"Wal, no," said Captain Corbet, "not 'xactly; fact is, we're kine
o' goin to take a vyge deoun the bay."
"Down the bay?"
"Yes. You see the boys kine o' want to go home by water, rayther
than by land."
"By water! Home by water!" repeated Mr. Long, doubtfully.
"Yes," said Captain Corbet; "an bein as the schewner was in good
repair, an corked, an coal-tarred, an whitewashed up fust rate, I
kine o' thought it would redound to our mootooil benefit if we went
off on sich a excursion,--bein pleasanter, cheaper, comfortabler,
an every way preferable to a land tower."
"Hem," said Dr. Porter, looking uneasily about. "I don't altogether
like it. Boys, what does it all mean?"
Thus appealed to, Bart became spokesman for the boys.
"Why, sir," said he, "we thought we'd like to go home by water--
that's all."
"Go home by water!" repeated the doctor once more, with a curious
smile.
"Yes, sir."
"What? by the Bay of Fundy?"
"Yes, sir."
"Who are going?"
"Well, sir, there are only a few of us. Bruce, and Arthur, and
Tom, and Phil, and Pat, besides myself."
"Bruce and Arthur?" said the doctor; "are they going home by the
Bay of Fundy?"
"Yes, sir," said Bart, with a smile.
"I don't see how they can get to the Gulf of St. Lawrence and
Prince Edward's Island from the Bay of Fundy," said the doctor,
"without going round Nova Scotia, and that will be a journey of
many hundred miles."
"O, no, sir," said Bruce; "we are going first to Moncton."
"O, is that the idea?"
"Yes, sir."
"And where will you go from Moncton?"
"To Shediac, and then home."
"And are you going to Newfoundland by that route, Tom?" asked the
doctor.
"Yes, sir," said Tom, gravely.
"From Shediac?"
"Yes, sir."
"I never knew before that there were vessels going from Shediac to
Newfoundland."
"O, I'm going to Prince Edward's Island first, sir, with Bruce and
Arthur," said Tom. "I'll find my way home from there."
The doctor smiled.
"I'm afraid you'll find it a long journey before you reach home.
Won't your friends be anxious?"
"O, no, sir. I wrote that I wanted to visit Bruce and Arthur, and
they gave me leave."
"And you, Phil, are you going home by the Antelope?"
"Yes, sir."
"You are going exactly in a straight line away from it."
"Am I, sir?"
"Of course you are. This isn't the way to Chester."
"Well, sir, you see I'm going to visit Bart at St. John."
"O, I understand. And that is your plan, then?"
"Yes, sir," said Bart. "Pat is going too."
"Where are you going first?"
"First, sir, we will sail to the Petitcodiac River, and go up it as
far as Moncton, where Bruce, and Arthur, and Tom will leave us."
"And then?"
"Then we will go to St. John, where Phil, and Pat, and I will leave
her. Solomon, too, will leave her there."
"Solomon!" cried the doctor. "What! Solomon! Is Solomon going?
Why, what can I do without Solomon? Here! Hallo!--Solomon! What
in the world's the meaning of all this?"
Thus summoned, Solomon came forth from the cabin, into which he had
dived at the first appearance of the doctor. His eyes were
downcast, his face was demure, his attitude and manner were abject.
"Solomon," said the doctor, "what's this I hear? Are you going to
St. John?"
"Ony temp'ly, sah--jist a leetle visit, sah," said Solomon, very
humbly, stealing looks at the boys from his downcast eyes.
"But what makes you go off this way without asking, or letting me
know?"
"Did I, sah?" said Solomon, rolling his eyes up as though horrified
at his own wickedness; "the sakes now! Declar, I clean forgot it."
"What are you going away for?"
"Why, sah, for de good oh my helf. Docta vises sea vyge; sides, I
got frens in St. John, an business dar, what muss be tended to."
"Well, well," said the doctor, "I suppose if you want to go you'll
find reasons enough; but at the same time you ought to have let me
known before."
"Darsn't, sah," said Solomon.
"Why not?"
"Fraid you'd not let me go," said Solomon, with a broad grin, that
instantly was suppressed by a demure cough.
"Nonsense," said the doctor; and then turning away, he spoke a few
words apart with Mr. Long.
"Well, boys," said the doctor, at last, "this project of yours
doesn't seem to me to be altogether safe, and I don't like to trust
you in this way without anybody as a responsible guardian."
Bart smiled.
"O, sir," said he, "you need not be at all uneasy. All of us are
accustomed to take care of ourselves; and besides, if you wanted a
responsible guardian for us, what better one could be found than
Captain Corbet?"
The doctor and Mr. Long both shook their heads. Evidently neither
of them attached any great importance to Captain Corbet's
guardianship.
"Did you tell your father how you were going?" asked the doctor,
after a few further words with Mr. Long.
"O, yes, sir; and he told me I might go. What's more, he promised
to charter a schooner for me to cruise about with Phil and Pat
after I arrived home."
"And we got permission, too," said Bruce.
"Indeed!" said the doctor. "That changes the appearance of things.
I was afraid that it was a whim of your own. And now, one thing
more,--how are you off for provisions?"
"Wal, sir," said Captain Corbet, "I've made my calculations, an I
think I've got enough. What I might fail in, the boys and Solomon
have made up."
"How is it, Solomon?" asked the doctor.
Solomon grinned.
"You sleep in the hold, I see," continued the doctor.
"Yes, sir," said Bruce. "It's whitewashed, and quite sweet now.
We'll only be on board two or three days at the farthest, and so it
really doesn't much matter how we go."
"Well, boys, I have no more to say; only take care of yourselves."
With these words the doctor and Mr. Long bade them good by, and
then walked away.
The other boys, however, stood on the wharf waiting to see the
vessel off. They themselves were all going to start for home in a
few minutes, and were only waiting for the departure of the
Antelope.
This could not now be long delayed. The tide was high. The wind
fresh and fair. The luggage, and provisions, and stores were all
on board. Captain Corbet was at the helm. All was ready. At
length the word was given, the lines were cast off; and the
Antelope moved slowly round, and left the wharf amid the cheers of
the boys. Farther and farther it moved away, then down the
tortuous channel of Mud Creek, until at last the broad expanse of
Minas Basin received them.
For this voyage the preparations had been complete. It had first
been thought of several weeks before, and then the plan and the
details had been slowly elaborated. It was thought to be an
excellent idea, and one which was in every respect worthy of the
"B. O. W. C." Captain Corbet embraced the proposal with enthusiasm.
Letters home, requesting permission, received favorable answers.
Solomon at first resisted, but finally, on being solemnly appealed
to as Grand Panjandrum, he found himself unable to withstand, and
thus everything was gradually prepared. Other details were
satisfactorily arranged, though not without much serious and earnest
debate. The question of costume received very careful attention,
and it was decided to adopt and wear the weather-beaten uniforms
that had done service amidst mud and water on a former occasion.
Solomon's presence was felt to be a security against any menacing
famine; and that assurance was made doubly sure by the presence of a
cooking stove, which Captain Corbet, mindful of former hardships,
had thoughtfully procured and set up in the hold. Finally, it was
decided that the flag which had formerly flaunted the breeze should
again wave over them; and so it was, that as the Antelope moved
through Mud Creek, like a thing of life, the black flag of the
"B. O. W. C." floated on high, with its blazonry of a skull, which
now, worn by time, looked more than ever like the face of some mild,
venerable, and paternal monitor.
Some time was taken up in arranging the hold. Considerable
confusion was manifest in that important locality. Tin pans were
intermingled with bedding, provisions with wearing apparel, books
with knives and forks, while amid the scene the cooking stove
towered aloft prominent. To tell the truth, the scene was rather
free and easy than elegant; nor could an unprejudiced observer have
called it altogether comfortable. In fact, to one who looked at it
with a philosophic mind, an air of squalor might possibly have been
detected. Yet what of that? The philosophic mind just alluded to
would have overlooked the squalor, and regarded rather the health,
the buoyant animal spirits, and the determined habit of enjoyment,
which all the ship's company evinced, without exception. The first
thing which they did in the way of preparation for the voyage was
to doff the garments of civilized life, and to don the costume of
the "B. O. W. C." Those red shirts, decorated with a huge white
cross on the back, had been washed and mended, and completely
reconstructed, so that the rents and patches which were here and
there visible on their fair exteriors, served as mementos of former
exploits, and called up associations of the past without at all
deteriorating from the striking effect of the present. Glengary
bonnets adorned their heads, and served to complete the costume.
The labor of dressing was followed by a hurried arrangement of the
trunks and bedding; after which they all emerged from the hold and
ascending to the deck, looked around upon the scene. Above, the
sky was blue and cloudless, and between them and the blue sky
floated the flag, from whose folds the face looked benignantly
down. The tide was now on the ebb, and as the wind was fair, both
wind and tide united to bear them rapidly onward. Before them was
Blomidon, while all around was the circling sweep of the shores of
Minas Bay. A better day for a start could not have been found, and
everything promised a rapid and pleasant run.
"I must say," remarked Captain Corbet, who had for some time been
standing buried in his own meditations at the helm,--"I must say,
boys, that I don't altogether regret bein once more on the briny
deep. There was a time," he continued, meditatively, "when I kine
o' anticipated givin up this here occypation, an stayin to hum a
nourishin of the infant. But man proposes, an woman disposes, as
the sayin is,--an you see what I'm druv to. It's a great thing for
a man to have a companion of sperrit, same as I have, that keeps a'
drivin an a drivin at him, and makes him be up an doin. An now, I
declar, if I ain't gittin to be a confirmed wanderer agin, same as
I was in the days of my halcyon an shinin youth. Besides, I have a
kine o' feelin as if I'd be a continewin this here the rest of all
my born days."
"I hope you won't feel homesick," remarked Bart, sympathetically.
"Homesick," repeated the captain. "Wal, you see thar's a good deal
to be said about it. In my hum thar's a attraction, but thar's
also a repulsion. The infant drors me hum, the wife of my buzzum
drives me away, an so thar it is, an I've got to knock under to the
strongest power. An that's the identical individool thing that
makes the aged Corbet a foogitive an a vagabond on the face of the
mighty deep. Still I have my consolations."
The captain paused for a few moments, and then resumed.
"Yes," he continued, "I have my consolations. Surroundins like
these here air a consolation. I like your young faces, an gay an
airy ways, boys. I like to see you enjoy life. So, go in. Pitch
in. Go ahead. Sing. Shout. Go on like mad. Carry on like all
possessed, an you'll find the aged Corbet smilin amid the din, an a
flutterin of his venerable locks triumphant amid the ragin an
riotin elements."
"It's a comfort to know that, at any rate," said Tom. "We'll give
you enough of that before we leave, especially as we know it don't
annoy you."
"I don't know how it is," said the captain, solemnly, "but I begin
to feel a sort of somethin towards you youngsters that's very
absorbin. It's a kine o' anxious fondness, with a mixtoor of
indulgent tenderness. How ever I got to contract sech a feelin
beats me. I s'pose it's bein deprived of my babby, an exiled from
home, an so my vacant buzzom craves to be filled. I've got a
dreadful talent for doin the pariential, an what's more, not only
for doin the pariential, but for feelin of it. So you boys, ef
ever you see me a doin of the pariential towards youns, please
remember that when I act like an anxious an too indulgent parient
towards youns, it's because I feel like one."
For some hours they traversed the waters, carried swiftly on by the
united forces of the wind and tide. At last they found themselves
close by Blomidon, and under his mighty shadow they sailed for some
time. Then they doubled the cape, and there, before them, lay a
long channel--the Straits of Minas, through which the waters pour
at every ebb and flood. Their course now lay through this to the
Bay of Fundy outside; and as it was within two hours of the low
tide, the current ran swiftly, hurrying them rapidly past the land.
Here the scene was grand and impressive in the extreme. On one
side arose a lofty, precipitous cliff, which extended for miles,
its sides scarred and tempest-torn, its crest fringed with trees,
towering overhead many hundreds of feet, black, and menacing, and
formidable. At its base was a steep beach, disclosed by the
retreating tide, which had been formed by the accumulated masses of
rock that had fallen in past ages from the cliffs above. These
now, from the margin of the water up to high-water mark, were
covered with a vast growth of sea-weed, which luxuriated here, and
ran parallel to the line of vegetation on the summit of the cliff.
On the other side of the strait the scene was different. Here the
shores were more varied; in one place, rising high on steep
precipices, in others, thrusting forth black, rocky promontories
into the deep channel; in others again, retreating far back, and
forming bays, round whose sloping shores appeared places fit for
human habitation, and in whose still waters the storm-tossed bark
might find a secure haven.
As they drifted on, borne along by the impetuous tide, the shores
on either side changed, and new vistas opened before them. At last
they reached the termination of the strait, the outer portal of
this long avenue, which here was marked by the mighty hand of
Nature in conspicuous characters. For here was the termination of
that long extent of precipitous cliff which forms the outline of
Blomidon; and this termination, abrupt, and stern, and black,
shows, in a concentrated form, the power of wind and wave. The
cliff ends abrupt, broken off short, and beyond this arise from the
water several giant fragments of rock, the first of which, shaped
like an irregular pyramid, rivals the cliff itself in height, and
is surrounded by other rocky fragments, all of which form a
colossal group, whose aggregated effect never fails to overawe the
mind of the spectator. Such is Cape Split, the terminus of Cape
Blomidon, on the side of the Bay of Fundy. Over its shaggy summits
now fluttered hundreds of sea-gulls; round its black base the waves
foamed and thundered, while the swift tide poured between the
interstices of the rugged rocks.
"Behind that thar rock," said Captain Corbet, pointing to Cape
Split," is a place they call Scott's Bay. Perhaps some of you have
heard tell of it."
"I have a faint recollection of such a place," said Bart. "Scott's
Bay, do you call it? Yes, that must be the place that I've heard
of; and is it behind this cape?"
"It's a bay that runs up thar," said the captain. "We'll see it
soon arter we get further down. It's a fishin and ship-buildin
place. They catch a dreadful lot of shad thar sometimes."
Swiftly the Antelope passed on, hurried on by the tide, and no
longer feeling much of the wind; swiftly she passed by the cliffs,
and by the cape, and onward by the sloping shores, till at length
the broad bosom of the Bay of Fundy extended before their eyes.
Here the wind ceased altogether, the water was smooth and calm, but
the tide still swept them along, and the shores on each side
receded, until at length they were fairly in the bay. Here, on one
side, the coast of Nova Scotia spread away, until it faded from
view in the distance, while on the other side the coast of New
Brunswick extended. Between the schooner and this latter coast a
long cape projected, while immediately in front arose a lofty
island of rock, whose summit was crowned with trees.
"What island is that?" asked Tom.
"That," said Captain Corbet, "is Isle o' Holt."
"I think I've heard it called Ile Haute," said Bart.
"All the same," said Captain Corbet, "ony I believe it was named
after the man that diskivered it fust, an his name was Holt."
"But it's a French name," said Tom; "Ile Haute means high island."
"Wal, mebbe he was a Frenchman," said Captain Corbet. "I won't
argufy--I dare say he was. There used to be a heap o' Frenchmen
about these parts, afore we got red of 'em."
"It's a black, gloomy, dismal, and wretched-looking place," said
Tom, after some minutes of silent survey.
II.
First Sight of a Place destined to be better known.--A Fog Mill.--
Navigation without Wind.--Fishing.--Boarding.--Under Arrest.--
Captain Corbet defiant.--The Revenue Officials frowned down.--
Corbet triumphant.
The Antelope had left the wharf at about seven in the morning. It
was now one o'clock. For the last two or three hours there had
been but little wind, and it was the tide which had carried her
along. Drifting on in this way, they had come to within a mile of
Ile Haute, and had an opportunity of inspecting the place which Tom
had declared to be so gloomy. In truth, Tom's judgment was not
undeserved. Ile Haute arose like a solid, unbroken rock out of the
deep waters of the Bay of Fundy, its sides precipitous, and scarred
by tempest, and shattered by frost. On its summit were trees, at
its base lay masses of rock that had fallen. The low tide
disclosed here, as at the base of Blomidon, a vast growth of black
sea-weed, which covered all that rocky shore. The upper end of the
island, which was nearest them, was lower, however, and went down
sloping to the shore, forming a place where a landing could easily
be effected. From this shore mud flats extended into the water.
"This end looks as though it had been cleared," said Bart.
"I believe it was," said the captain.
"Does anybody live here?"
"No."
"Did any one ever live here?"
"Yes, once, some one tried it, I believe, but gave it up."
"Does it belong to anybody, or is it public property?"
"O, I dare say it belongs to somebody, if you could only get him to
claim it."
"I say, captain," said Bruce, "how much longer are we going to
drift?"
"O, not much longer. The tide's about on the turn, and we'll have
a leetle change."
"What! will we drift back again?"
"O, I shouldn't wonder if we had a leetle wind afore long."
"But if we don't, will we drift back again into the Basin of
Minas?"
"O, dear, no. We can anchor hereabouts somewhar."
"You won't anchor by this island,--will you?"
"O, dear, no. We'll have a leetle driftin first." As the captain
spoke, he looked earnestly out upon the water.
"Thar she comes," he cried at last, pointing over the water. The
boys looked, and saw the surface of the bay all rippled over. They
knew the signs of wind, and waited for the result. Soon a faint
puff came up the bay, which filled the languid sails, and another
puff came up more strongly, and yet another, until at length a
moderate breeze was blowing. The tide no longer dragged them on.
It was on the turn; and as the vessel caught the wind, it yielded
to the impetus, and moved through the water, heading across the bay
towards the New Brunswick shore, in such a line as to pass near to
that cape which has already been spoken of.
"If the wind holds out," said Captain Corbet, "so as to carry us
past Cape d'Or, we can drift up with this tide."
"Where's Cape d'Or?"
"That there," said Captain Corbet, pointing to the long cape which
stretched between them and the New Brunswick shore. "An if it goes
down, an we can't get by the cape, we'll be able, at any rate, to
drop anchor there, an hold on till the next tide."
The returning tide, and the fresh breeze that blew now, bore them
onward rapidly, and they soon approached Cape d'Or. They saw that
it terminated in a rocky cliff, with rocky edges jutting forth, and
that all the country adjoining was wild and rugged. But the wind,
having done this much for them, now began to seem tired of favoring
them, and once more fell off.
"I don't like this," said Captain Corbet, looking around.
"What?"
"All this here," said he, pointing to the shore.
It was about a mile away, and the schooner, borne along now by the
tide, was slowly drifting on to an unpleasant proximity to the
rocky shore.
"I guess we've got to anchor," said Captain Corbet; "there's no
help for it."
"To anchor?" said Bruce, in a tone of disappointment.
"Yes, anchor; we've got to do it," repeated the captain, in a
decided tone. The boys saw that there was no help for it, for the
vessel was every moment drawing in closer to the rocks; and though
it would not have been very dangerous for her to run ashore in that
calm water, yet it would not have been pleasant. So they
suppressed their disappointment, and in a few minutes the anchor
was down, and the schooner's progress was stopped.
"Thar's one secret," said the captain, "of navigatin in these here
waters, an that is, to use your anchor. My last anchor I used for
nigh on thirty year, till it got cracked. I mayn't be much on
land, but put me anywhars on old Fundy, an I'm to hum. I know
every current on these here waters, an can foller my nose through
the thickest fog that they ever ground out at old Manan."
"What's that?" asked Bart. "What did you say about grinding out
fog?"
"O, nothin, ony thar's an island down the bay, you know, called
Grand Manan, an seafarin men say that they've got a fog mill down
thar, whar they grind out all the fog for the Bay of Fundy. I
can't say as ever I've seen that thar mill, but I've allus found
the fog so mighty thick down thar that I think thar's a good deal
in the story."
"I suppose we'll lose this tide," said Phil.
"Yes, I'm afeard so," said the captain, looking around over the
water. "This here wind ain't much, any way; you never can reckon
on winds in this bay. I don't care much about them. I'd a most
just as soon go about the bay without sails as with them. What I
brag on is the tides, an a jodgmatical use of the anchor."
"You're not in earnest?"
"Course I am."
"Could you get to St. John from Grand Pre without sails?"
"Course I could."
"I don't see how you could manage to do it."
"Do it? Easy enough," said the captain. "You see I'd leave with
the ebb tide, and get out into the bay. Then I'd anchor an wait
till the next ebb, an so on. Bless your hearts, I've often done
it."
"But you couldn't get across the bay by drifting."
"Course I could. I'd work my way by short drifts over as far as
this, an then I'd gradually move along till I kine o' canted over
to the New Brunswick shore. It takes time to do it, course it
does; but what I mean to say is this--it CAN be done."
"Well, I wouldn't like to be on board while you were trying to do
it."
"Mebbe not. I ain't invitin you to do it, either. All I was sayin
is, it CAN be done. Sails air very good in their way, course they
air, an who's objectin to 'em? I'm only sayin that in this here
bay thar's things that's more important than sails, by a long
chalk--such as tides, an anchors in particular. Give me them thar,
an I don't care a hooter what wind thar is."
Lying thus at anchor, under the hot sun, was soon found to be
rather dull, and the boys sought in vain for some way of passing
the time. Different amusements were invented for the occasion.
The first amusement consisted in paper boats, with which they ran
races, and the drift of these frail vessels over the water afforded
some excitement. Then they made wooden boats with huge paper
sails. In this last Bart showed a superiority to the others; for,
by means of a piece of iron hoop, which he inserted as a keel, he
produced a boat which was able to carry an immense press of sail,
and in the faint and scarce perceptible breeze, easily distanced
the others. This accomplishment Bart owed to his training in a
seaport town.
At length one of them proposed that they should try to catch fish.
Captain Corbet, in answer to their eager inquiries, informed them
that there were fish everywhere about the bay; on learning which
they became eager to try their skill. Some herring were on board,
forming part of the stores, and these were taken for bait. Among
the miscellaneous contents of the cabin a few hooks were found,
which were somewhat rusty, it is true, yet still good enough for
the purpose before them. Lines, of course, were easily procured,
and soon a half dozen baited hooks were down in the water, while a
half dozen boys, eager with suspense, watched the surface of the
water.
For a half hour they held their lines suspended without any result;
but at the end of that time, a cry from Phil roused them, and on
looking round they saw him clinging with all his might to his line,
which was tugged at tightly by something in the water. Bruce ran
to help him, and soon their united efforts succeeded in landing on
the deck of the vessel a codfish of very respectable size. The
sight of this was greeted with cheers by the others, and served to
stimulate them to their work.
After this others were caught, and before half an hour more some
twenty codfish, of various sizes, lay about the deck, as trophies
of their piscatory skill. They were now more excited than ever,
and all had their hooks in the water, and were waiting eagerly for
a bite, when an exclamation from Captain Corbet roused them.
On turning their heads, and looking in the direction where he was
pointing, they saw a steamboat approaching them. It was coming
from the head of the bay on the New Brunswick side, and had
hitherto been concealed by the projecting cape.
"What's that?" said Bart. "Is it the St. John steamer?"
"No, SIR," said the captain. She's a man-o'-war steamer--the
revenoo cutter, I do believe."
"How do you know?"
"Why, by her shape."
"She seems to be coming this way."
"Yes, bound to Minas Bay, I s'pose. Wal, wal, wal! strange too,--
how singoolarly calm an onterrified I feel in'ardly. Why, boys,
I've seen the time when the sight of a approachin revenoo vessel
would make me shiver an shake from stem to starn. But now how
changed! Such, my friends, is the mootability of human life!"
The boys looked at the steamer for a few moments, but at length
went back to their fishing. The approaching steamer had nothing in
it to excite curiosity: such an object was too familiar to withdraw
their thoughts from the excitement of their lines and hooks, and
the hope which each had of surpassing the other in the number of
catches animated them to new trials. So they soon forgot all about
the approaching steamer.
But Captain Corbet had nothing else to do, and so, whether it was
on account of his lack of employment, or because of the sake of old
associations, he kept his eyes fixed on the steamer. Time passed
on, and in the space of another half hour she had drawn very near
to the Antelope.
Suddenly Captain Corbet slapped his hand against his thigh.
"Declar, if they ain't a goin to overhaul us!" he cried.
At this the boys all turned again to look at the steamer.
"Declar, if that fellow in the gold hat ain't a squintin at us
through his spy-glass!" cried the captain.
As the boys looked, they saw that the Antelope had become an object
of singular attention and interest to those on board of the
steamer. Men were on the forecastle, others on the main deck, the
officers were on the quarter-deck, and all were earnestly
scrutinizing the Antelope. One of them was looking at her through
his glass. The Antelope, as she lay at anchor, was now turned with
her stern towards the steamer, and her sails flapping idly against
the masts. In a few moments the paddles of the steamer stopped,
and at the same instant a gun was fired.
"Highly honored, kind sir," said Captain Corbet, with a grin.
"What's the matter?" asked Bart.
"Matter? Why that thar steamer feels kine o' interested in us, an
that thar gun means, HEAVE TO."
"Are you going to heave to?"
"Nary heave."
"Why not?"
"Can't come it no how; cos why, I'm hove to, with the anchor hard
and fast, ony they can't see that we're anchored."
Suddenly a cry came over the water from a man on the quarter-deck.
"Ship aho-o-o-o-o-oy!"
"Hel-lo-o-o-o-o!"
Such was the informal reply of Captain Corbet.
"Heave to-o-o-o, till I send a boat aboard."
"Hoo-r-a-a-a-a-ay!"
Such was again Captain Corbet's cheerful and informal answer.
"Wal! wal wal!" he exclaimed, "it does beat my grandmother--they're
goin to send a boat aboard."
"What for?"
Captain Corbet grinned, and shook his head, and chuckled very
vehemently, but said nothing. He appeared to be excessively amused
with his own thoughts. The boys looked at the steamer, and then at
Captain Corbet, in some wonder; but as he said nothing, they were
silent, and waited to see what was going to happen. Meanwhile
Solomon, roused from some mysterious culinary duties by the report
of the gun, had scrambled upon the deck, and stood with the others
looking out over the water at the steamer.
In a few moments the steamer's boat was launched, and a half dozen
sailors got in, followed by an officer. Then they put off, and
rowed with vigorous strokes towards the schooner.
Captain Corbet watched the boat for some time in silence.
"Cur'ouser an cur'ouser," he said, at length. "I've knowed the
time, boys, when sech an incident as this, on the briny deep, would
have fairly keeled me over, an made me moot, an riz every har o' my
head; but look at me now. Do I tremble? do I shake? Here, feel my
pulse."
Phil, who stood nearest, put his finger on the outstretched wrist
of the captain.
"Doos it beat?"
"No," said Phil.
"Course it beats; but then it ony beats nateral. You ain't feelin
the right spot--the humane pulse not bein sitooated on the BACK of
the hand," he added mildly, "but here;" and he removed Phil's
inexperienced finger to the place where the pulse lies. "Thar,
now," he added, "as that pulse beats now, even so it beat a half
hour ago, before that thar steamer hev in sight. Why, boys, I've
knowed the time when this humane pulse bet like all possessed. You
see, I've lived a life of adventoor, in spite of my meek and quiet
natoor, an hev dabbled at odd times in the smugglin business. But
they don't catch me this time--I've retired from that thar, an the
Antelope lets the revenoo rest in peace."
The boat drew nearer and nearer, and the officer at the stern
looked scrutinizingly at the Antelope. There was an air of
perplexity about his face, which was very visible to those on
board, and the perplexity deepened and intensified as his eyes
rested on the flag of the "B. O. W. C."
"Leave him to me," said Captain Corbet. "Leave that thar young man
to me. I enjy havin to do with a revenoo officer jest now; so
don't go an put in your oars, but jest leave him to me."
"All right, captain; we won't say a word," said Bruce. "We'll go
on with our fishing quietly. Come, boys--look sharp, and down with
your lines."
The interest which they had felt in these new proceedings had
caused the boys to pull up their hooks; but now, at Bruce's word,
they put them in the water once more, and resumed their fishing,
only casting sidelong glances at the approaching boat.
In a few minutes the boat was alongside, and the officer leaped on
board. He looked all around, at the fish lying about the deck, at
the boys engaged in fishing, at Captain Corbet, at Solomon, at the
mysterious flag aloft, and finally at the boys. These all took no
notice of him, but appeared to be intent on their task.
"What schooner is this?" he asked, abruptly.
"The schooner Antelope, Corbet master," replied the captain.
"Are you the master?"
"I am."
"Where do you belong?"
"Grand Pre."
"Grand Pre?
"Yes."
"Hm," he replied, with a stare around--"Grand Pre--ah---hm."
"Yes, jest so."
"What's that?"
"I briefly remarked that it was jest so."
"What's the reason you didn't lie to, when you were hailed?"
"Lay to?"
"Yes."
"Couldn't do it."
"What do you mean by that?" asked the officer, who was rather
ireful, and somewhat insulting in his manner.
"Wal bein as I was anchored here hard an fast, I don't exactly see
how I could manage to go through that thar manoeuvre, unless you'd
kindly lend me the loan of your steam ingine to do it on."
"Look here, old man; you'd better look out."
"Wal, I dew try to keep a good lookout. How much'll you take for
the loan o' that spy-glass o' yourn?"
"Let me see your papers."
"Papers?"
"Yes, your papers."
"Hain't got none."
"What's that?"
"Hain't got none."
"You--haven't--any--papers?"
"Nary paper."
The officer's brow grew dark. He looked around the vessel once
more, and then looked frowningly at Captain Corbet, who encountered
his glance with a serene smile.
"Look here, old man," said he; "you can't come it over me. Your
little game's up, old fellow. This schooner's seized."
"Seized? What for?"
"For violation of the law, by fishing within the limits."
"Limits? What limits?"
"No foreign vessel can come within three miles of the shore."
"Foreign vessel? Do you mean to call me a foreigner?"
"Of course I do. You're a Yankee fisherman."
"Am I?"
"Of course you are; and what do you mean by that confounded rag up
there?" cried the officer, pointing to the flag of the "B. O. W. C."
"If you think you can fish in this style, you'll find yourself
mistaken. I know too much about this business."
"Do you? Well, then, kind sir, allow me to mention that you've got
somethin to larn yet--spite o' your steam injines an spy-glasses."
"What's that?" cried the officer, furious. "I'll let you know. I
arrest you, and this vessel is seized."
"Wait a minute, young sir," cried Captain Corbet; "not QUITE so
fast, EF you please. You'll get YOURSELF arrested. What do you
mean by this here? Do you know who I am? I, sir, am a subject of
Queen Victory. My home is here. I'm now on my own natyve shore.
A foreigner, am I? Let me tell you, sir, that I was born, brung
up, nourished, married, an settled in this here province, an I've
got an infant born here, an I'm not a fisherman, an this ain't a
fishin vessel. You arrest me ef you dar. You'll see who'll get
the wust of it in the long run. I'd like precious well to get
damages--yea, swingin damages--out of one of you revenoo fellers."
The officer looked around again. It would not do to make a
mistake. Captain Corbet's words were not without effect.
"Yea!" cried Captain Corbet. "Yea, naval sir! I'm a free Nova
Scotian as free as a bird. I cruise about my natyve coasts whar I
please. Who's to hender? Seize me if you dar, an it'll be the
dearest job you ever tried. This here is my own private pleasure
yacht. These are my young friends, natyves, an amatoor fishermen.
Cast your eye down into yonder hold, and see if this here's a
fishin craft."
The officer looked down, and saw a cooking stove, trunks, and
bedding. He looked around in doubt.
But this scene had lasted long enough.
"O, nonsense!" said Bart, suddenly pulling up his line, and coming
forward; "see here--it's all right," said he to the officer.
"We're not fishermen. It's as he says. We're only out on a short
cruise, you know, for pleasure, and that sort of thing."
As Bart turned, the others did the same. Bruce lounged up,
dragging his line, followed by Arthur and the others.
"We're responsible for the schooner," said Bruce, quietly. "It's
ours for the time being. We don't look like foreign fishermen--do
we?"
The officer looked at the boys, and saw his mistake at once. He
was afraid that he had made himself ridiculous. The faces and
manners of the boys, as they stood confronting him in an easy and
self-possessed manner, showed most plainly the absurdity of his
position. Even the mysterious flag became intelligible, when he
looked at the faces of those over whom it floated.
"I suppose it's all right," he muttered, in a vexed tone, and
descended into the boat without another word.
"Sorry to have troubled you, captain," said Corbet, looking blandly
after the officer; "but it wan't my fault. I didn't have charge of
that thar injine."
The officer turned his back without a word, and the men pulled off
to the steamer.
The captain looked after the boat in silence for some time.
"I'm sorry," said he, at length, as he heaved a gentle sigh,--"I'm
sorry that you put in your oars--I do SO like to sass a revonoo
officer."
III.
Solomon surpasses himself.--A Period of Joy is generally followed
by a Time of Sorrow.--Gloomy Forebodings.--The Legend of Petticoat
Jack.--Captain Corbet discourses of the Dangers of the Deep, and
puts in Practice a new and original Mode of Navigation.
This interruption put an end to their attempts at fishing, and was
succeeded by another interruption of a more pleasing character, in
the shape of dinner, which was now loudly announced by Solomon.
For some time a savory steam had been issuing from the lower
regions, and had been wafted to their nostrils in successive puffs,
until at last their impatient appetite had been roused to the
keenest point, and the enticing fragrance had suggested all sorts
of dishes. When at length the summons came, and they went below,
they found the dinner in every way worthy of the occasion.
Solomon's skill never was manifested more conspicuously than on
this occasion; and whether the repast was judged of by the quantity
or the quality of the dishes, it equally deserved to be considered
as one of the masterpieces of the distinguished artist who had
prepared it.
"Dar, chil'en," he exclaimed, as they took their places, "dar,
cap'en, jes tas dem ar trout, to begin on, an see if you ever saw
anythin to beat 'em in all your born days. Den try de stew, den de
meat pie, den de calf's head; but dat ar pie down dar mustn't be
touched, nor eben so much as looked at, till de las ob all."
And with these words Solomon stepped back, leaning both hands on
his hips, and surveyed the banquet and the company with a smile of
serene and ineffable complacency.
"All right, Solomon, my son," said Bart. "Your dinner is like
yourself--unequalled and unapproachable."
"Bless you, bless you, my friend," murmured Bruce, in the intervals
of eating; "if there is any contrast between this present voyage
and former ones, it is all due to our unequalled caterer."
"How did you get the trout, Solomon?" said Phil.
"De trout? O, I picked 'em up last night down in de village," said
Solomon. "Met little boy from Gaspereaux, an got 'em from him."
"What's this?" cried Tom, opening a dish--"not lobster!"
"Lobster!" exclaimed Phil.
"So it is."
"Why, Solomon, where did you get lobster?"
"Is this the season for them?"
"Think of the words of the poet, boys," said Bart, warningly,--
"In the months without the R,
Clams and lobsters pison are."
Solomon meanwhile stood apart, grinning from ear to ear, with his
little black beads of eyes twinkling with merriment.
"Halo, Solomon! What do you say to lobsters in July?"
Solomon's head wagged up and down, as though he were indulging in
some quiet, unobtrusive laughter, and it was some time before he
replied.
"O, neber you fear, chil'en," he said; "ef you're only goin to get
sick from lobsters, you'll live a long day. You may go in for
clams, an lobsters, an oysters any time ob de yeah you like,--ony
dey mus be cooked up proper."
"I'm gratified to hear that," said Bruce, gravely, "but at the same
time puzzled. For Mrs. Pratt says the exact opposite; and so here
we have two great authorities in direct opposition. So what are we
to think?"
"O, there's no difficulty," said Arthur, "for the doctors are not
of equal authority. Mrs. Pratt is a quack, but Solomon is a
professional--a regular, natural, artistic, and scientific cook,
which at sea is the same as doctor."
The dinner was prolonged to an extent commensurate with its own
inherent excellence and the capacity of the boys to appreciate it;
but at length, like all things mortal, it came to a termination,
and the company went up once more to the deck. On looking round it
was evident to all that a change had taken place.
Four miles away lay Ile Haute, and eight or ten miles beyond this
lay the long line of Nova Scotia. It was now about four o'clock,
and the tide had been rising for three hours, and was flowing up
rapidly, and in a full, strong current. As yet there was no wind,
and the broad surface of the bay was quite smooth and unruffled.
In the distance and far down the bay, where its waters joined the
horizon, there was a kind of haze, that rendered the line of
separation between sea and sky very indistinct. The coast of Nova
Scotia was at once enlarged and obscured. It seemed now elevated
to an unusual height above the sea line, as though it had been
suddenly brought several miles nearer, and yet, instead of being
more distinct, was actually more obscure. Even Ile Haute, though
so near, did not escape. Four miles of distance were not sufficient
to give it that grand indistinctness which was now flung over the
Nova Scotia coast; yet much of the mysterious effect of the haze had
gathered about the island; its lofty cliffs seemed to tower on high
more majestically, and to lean over more frowningly; its fringe of
black sea-weed below seemed blacker, while the general hue of the
island had changed from a reddish color to one of a dull slaty blue.
"I don't like this," said Captain Corbet, looking down the bay and
twisting up his face as he looked.
"Why not?"
Captain Corbet shook his head.
"What's the matter?"
"Bad, bad, bad!" said the captain.
"Is there going to be a storm?"
"Wuss!"
"Worse? What?"
"Fog."
"Fog?"
"Yes, hot an heavy, thick as puddin, an no mistake. I tell you
what it is, boys: judgin from what I see, they've got a bran-new
steam injine into that thar fog mill at Grand Manan; an the way
they're goin to grind out the fog this here night is a caution to
mariners."
Saying this, he took off his hat, and holding it in one hand, he
scratched his venerable head long and thoughtfully with the other.
"But I don't see any fog as yet," said Bart.
"Don't see it? Wal, what d'ye call all that?" said the captain,
giving a grand comprehensive sweep with his arm, so as to take in
the entire scene.
"Why, it's clear enough."
"Clear? Then let me tell you that when you see a atmosphere like
this here, then you may expect to see it any moment changed into
deep, thick fog. Any moment--five minutes 'll be enough to snatch
everything from sight, and bury us all in the middle of a unyversal
fog bank."
"What'll we do?"
"Dew? That's jest the question."
"Can we go on?"
"Wal--without wind--I don't exactly see how. In a fog a wind is
not without its advantages. That's one of the times when the old
Antelope likes to have her sails up; but as we hain't got no wind,
I don't think we'll do much."
"Will you stay here at anchor?"
"At anchor? Course not. No, sir. Moment the tide falls again,
I'll drift down so as to clear that pint there,--Cape Chignecto,--
then anchor; then hold on till tide rises; and then drift up.
Mebbe before that the wind 'll spring up, an give us a lift somehow
up the bay."
"How long before the tide will turn?"
"Wal, it'll be high tide at about a quarter to eight this evenin, I
calc'late."
"You'll drift in the night, I suppose."
"Why not?"
"O, I didn't know but what the fog and the night together might be
too much for you."
"Too much? Not a bit of it. Fog, and night, and snow-storms, an
tide dead agin me, an a lee shore, are circumstances that the
Antelope has met over an over, an fit down. As to foggy nights,
when it's as calm as this, why, they're not wuth considerin."
Captain Corbet's prognostication as to the fog proved to be
correct. It was only for a short time that they were allowed to
stare at the magnified proportions of the Nova Scotia coast and
Ile Haute. Then a change took place which attracted all their
attention.
The change was first perceptible down the bay. It was first made
manifest by the rapid appearance of a thin gray cloud along the
horizon, which seemed to take in both sea and sky, and absorbed
into itself the outlines of both. At the same time, the coast of
Nova Scotia grew more obscure, though it lost none of its magnified
proportions, while the slaty blue of Ile Haute changed to a grayer
shade.
This change was rapid, and was followed by other changes. The thin
gray cloud, along the south-west horizon, down the bay, gradually
enlarged itself; till it grew to larger and loftier proportions.
In a quarter of an hour it had risen to the dimensions of the Nova
Scotia coast. In a half an hour it was towering to double that
height. In an hour its lofty crest had ascended far up into the
sky.
"It's a comin," said Captain Corbet. "I knowed it. Grind away,
you old fog mill! Pile on the steam, you Grand Mananers!"
"Is there any wind down there?"
"Not a hooter."
"Is the fog coming up without any wind?"
"Course it is. What does the fog want of wind?"
"I thought it was the wind that brought it along."
"Bless your heart, the fog takes care of itself. The wind isn't a
bit necessary. It kine o' pervades the hull atmosphere, an rolls
itself on an on till all creation is overspread. Why, I've seen
everything changed from bright sunshine to the thickest kind of fog
in fifteen minutes,--yea, more,--and in five minutes."
Even while they were speaking the fog rolled on, the vast
accumulation of mist rose higher and yet higher, and appeared to
draw nearer with immense rapidity. It seemed as though the whole
atmosphere was gradually becoming condensed, and precipitating its
invisible watery vapor so as to make it visible in far-extending
fog banks. It was not wind, therefore, that brought on the clouds,
for the surface of the water was smooth and unruffled, but it was
the character of the atmosphere itself from which this change was
wrought. And still, as they looked at the approaching mist, the
sky overhead was blue, and the sun shone bright. But the gathering
clouds seemed now to have gained a greater headway, and came on
more rapidly. In a few minutes the whole outline of the Nova
Scotia coast faded from view, and in its place there appeared a
lofty wall of dim gray cloud, which rose high in the air, fading
away into the faintest outline. Overhead, the blue sky became
rapidly more obscured; Ile Haute changed again from its grayish
blue to a lighter shade, and then became blended with the
impenetrable fog that was fast enclosing all things; and finally
the clouds grew nearer, till the land nearest them was snatched
from view, and all around was alike shrouded under the universal
veil; nothing whatever was visible. For a hundred yards, or so,
around them, they could see the surface of the water; but beyond
this narrow circle, nothing more could be discerned.
"It's a very pooty fog," said Captain Corbet, "an I only wonder
that there ain't any wind. If it should come, it'll be all right."
"You intend, then, to go on just the same."
"Jest the same as ef the sky was clear. I will up anchor as the
tide begins to fall, an git a good piece down, so as to dodge Cape
Chegnecto, an there wait for the rising tide, an jest the same as
ef the sun was shinin. But we can't start till eight o'clock this
evenin. Anyhow, you needn't trouble yourselves a mite. You may
all go to sleep, an dream that the silver moon is guidin the
traveller on the briny deep."
The scene now was too monotonous to attract attention, and the boys
once more sought for some mode of passing the time. Nothing
appeared so enticing as their former occupation of fishing, and to
this they again turned their attention. In this employment the
time passed away rapidly until the summons was given for tea.
Around the festive board, which was again prepared by Solomon with
his usual success, they lingered long, and at length, when they
arose, the tide was high. It was now about eight o'clock in the
evening, and Captain Corbet was all ready to start. As the tide
was now beginning to turn, and was on the ebb, the anchor was
raised, and the schooner, yielding to the pressure of the current,
moved away from her anchorage ground. It was still thick, and
darkness also was coming on. Not a thing could be discerned, and
by looking at the water, which moved with the schooner, it did not
seem as though any motion was made.
"That's all your blindness," said the captain, as they mentioned it
to him. "You can't see anything but the water, an as it is movin
with us, it doesn't seem as though we were movin. But we air,
notwithstandin, an pooty quick too. I'll take two hours' drift
before stoppin, so as to make sure. I calc'late about that time to
get to a place whar I can hit the current that'll take me, with the
risin tide, up to old Petticoat Jack."
"By the way, captain," said Phil, "what do you seafaring men
believe about the origin of that name--Petitcodiac? Is it Indian
or French?"
"'Tain't neither," said Captain Corbet, decidedly. "It's good
English; it's 'Petticoat Jack;' an I've hearn tell a hundred times
about its original deryvation. You see, in the old French war,
there was an English spy among the French, that dressed hisself up
as a woman, an was familiarly known, among the British generals an
others that emply'd him, as 'Petticoat Jack.' He did much to
contriboot to the defeat of the French; an arter they were licked,
the first settlers that went up thar called the place, in honor of
their benefacture, 'Petticoat Jack;' an it's bore that name ever
sence. An people that think it's French, or Injine, or Greek, or
Hebrew, or any other outlandish tongue, don't know what they're
talkin about. Now, I KNOW, an I assure you what I've ben a sayin's
the gospel terewth, for I had it of an old seafarin man that's
sailed this bay for more'n forty year, an if he ain't good
authority, then I'd like to know who is--that's all."
At this explanation of the etymology of the disputed term, the boys
were silent, and exchanged glances of admiration.
It was some minutes after eight when they left their anchorage, and
began to drift once more. There was no moon, and the night would
have been dark in any case, but now the fog rendered all things
still more obscure. It had also grown much thicker than it had
been. At first it was composed of light vapors, which surrounded
them on all sides, it is true, but yet did not have that dampness
which might have been expected. It was a light, dry fog, and for
two or three hours the deck, and rigging, and the clothes of those
on board remained quite dry. But now, as the darkness increased,
the fog became denser, and was more surcharged with heavy vapors.
Soon the deck looked as though it had received a shower of rain,
and the clothes of those on board began to be penetrated with the
chill damp.
"It's very dark, captain," said Bruce, at last, as the boys stood
near the stern.
"Dradful dark," said the captain, thoughtfully.
"Have you really a good idea of where we are?"
"An idee? Why, if I had a chart,--which I haven't, cos I've got it
all mapped out in my head,--but if I had one, I could take my
finger an pint the exact spot where we are a driftin this blessed
minute."
"You're going straight down the bay, I suppose."
"Right--yea, I am; I'm goin straight down; but I hope an trust, an
what's more, I believe, I am taking a kine o' cant over nigher the
New Brunswick shore."
"How long will we drift?"
"Wal, for about two hours--darsn't drift longer; an besides, don't
want to."
"Why not?"
"Darsn't. Thar's a place down thar that every vessel on this here
bay steers clear of, an every navigator feels dreadful shy of."
"What place is that?"
"Quaco Ledge," said Captain Corbet, in a solemn tone. "We'll get
as near it as is safe this night, an p'aps a leetle nearer; but,
then, the water's so calm and still, that it won't make any
difference--in fact, it wouldn't matter a great deal if we came up
close to it."
"Quaco Ledge?" said Bruce. "I've heard of that."
"Heard of it? I should rayther hope you had. Who hasn't? It's
the one great, gen'ral, an standin terror of this dangerous and
iron-bound bay. There's no jokin, no nonsense about Quaco Ledge;
mind I tell you."
"Where does it lie?" asked Phil, after a pause.
"Wal, do you know whar Quaco settlement is?"
"Yes."
"Wal, Quaco Ledge is nigh about half way between Quaco settlement
and Ile Haute, bein a'most in the middle of the bay, an in a
terrible dangerous place for coasters, especially in a fog, or in a
snow-storm. Many's the vessel that's gone an never heard of, that
Quaco Ledge could tell all about, if it could speak. You take a
good snowstorm in this Bay of Fundy, an let a schooner get lost in
it, an not know whar she is, an if Quaco Ledge don't bring her up
all standin, then I'm a Injine."
"Is it a large place?"
"Considerably too large for comfort," said the captain. "They've
sounded it, an found the whole shoal about three an a half mile
long, an a half a mile broad. It's all kivered over with water at
high tide, but at half tide it begins to show its nose, an at low
tide you see as pooty a shoal for shipwrecking as you may want;
rayther low with pleasant jagged rocks at the nothe-east side, an
about a hundred yards or so in extent. I've been nigh on to it in
clear weather, but don't want to be within five miles of it in a
fog or in a storm. In a thick night like this, I'll pull up before
I get close."
"You've never met with any accident there, I suppose."
"Me? No, not me. I always calc'late to give Quaco Ledge the
widest kine o' berth. An I hope you'll never know anythin more
about that same place than what I'm tellin you now. The knowlege
which one has about that place, an places ginrally of that kine,
comes better by hearsay than from actool observation."
Time passed on, and they still drifted, and at length ten o'clock
came; but before that time the boys had gone below, and retired for
the night. Shortly after, the rattle of the chains waked them all,
and informed them that the Antelope had anchored once more.
After this they all fell asleep.
IV.
In Clouds and Darkness.--A terrible Warning.--Nearly run down.--A
lively Place.--Bart encounters an old Acquaintance.--Launched into
the Deep.--Through the Country.--The Swift Tide.--The lost Boy.
The boys had not been asleep for more than two hours, when they
were awakened by an uproar on deck, and rousing themselves from
sleep, they heard the rattle of the chains and the crank of the
windlass. As their night attire was singularly simple, and
consisted largely of the dress which they wore by day, being the
same, in fact, with the exception of the hat, it was not long
before they were up on deck, and making inquiries as to the unusual
noise. That the anchor was being hoisted they already knew, but
why it was they did not.
"Wal," said Captain Corbet, "thar's a good sou-wester started up,
an as I had a few winks o' sleep, I jest thought I'd try to push on
up the bay, an get as far as I could. If I'd ben in any other
place than this, I wouldn't hev minded, but I'd hev taken my snooze
out; but I'm too near Quaco Ledge by a good sight, an would rayther
get further off. The sou-wester'll take us up a considerable
distance, an if it holds on till arter the tide turns, I ask no
more."
Soon the anchor was up, and the Antelope spread her sails, and
catching the sou-wester, dashed through the water like a thing of
life.
"We're going along at a great rate, captain," said Bart.
"Beggin your pardon, young sir, we're not doin much. The tide here
runs four knots agin us--dead, an the wind can't take us more'n
six, which leaves a balance to our favor of two knots an hour, an
that is our present rate of progression. You see, at that rate we
won't gain more'n four or five miles before the turn o' tide.
After that, we'll go faster without any wind than we do now with a
wind. O, there's nothin like navigatin the Bay o' Fundy to make a
man feel contempt for the wind. Give me tides an anchors, I say,
an I'll push along."
The wind was blowing fresh, and the sea was rising, yet the fog
seemed thicker than ever. The boys thought that the wind might
blow the fog away, and hinted this to the captain.
His only response was a long and emphatic whistle.
"Whe-e-e-ew! what! Blow the fog away? This wind? Why, this wind
brings the fog. The sou-wester is the one wind that seafarin men
dread in the Bay of Fundy. About the wust kine of a storm is that
thar very identical wind blowin in these here very identical
waters."
Captain Corbet's words were confirmed by the appearance of sea and
sky. Outside was the very blackness of darkness. Nothing whatever
was visible. Sea and sky were alike hidden from view. The waves
were rising, and though they were not yet of any size, still they
made noise enough to suggest the idea of a considerable storm, and
the wind, as it whistled through the rigging, carried in its sound
a menace which would have been altogether wanting in a bright
night. The boys all felt convinced that a storm was rising, and
looked forward to a dismal experience of the pangs of seasickness.
To fight this off now became their chief aim, and with this
intention they all hurried below once more to their beds.
But the water was not rough, the motion of the schooner was gentle,
and though there was much noise above, yet they did not notice any
approach of the dreaded sea-sickness, and so in a short time they
all fell asleep once more.
But they were destined to have further interruptions. The
interruption came this time in a loud cry from Solomon, which waked
them all at once.
"Get up, chil'en! get up! It's all over!"
"What, what!" cried the boys; "what's the matter?" and springing up
in the first moment of alarm, they stood listening.
As they stood, there came to their ears the roaring of the wind
through the rigging, the flapping of the sails, the dashing and
roaring of the waters, in the midst of which there came also a
shrill, penetrating sound, which seemed almost overhead--the sound
of some steam whistle.
"Dar, dar!" cried Solomon, in a tone of deadly fear. "It's a
comin! I knowed it. We're all lost an gone. It's a steamer.
We're all run down an drownded."
Without a word of response, the boys once more clambered on deck.
All was as dark as before, the fog as thick, the scene around as
impenetrable, the wind as strong. From a distance there came over
the water, as they listened, the rapid beat of a steamboat's
paddles, and soon there arose again the long, shrill yell of the
steam whistle. They looked all around, but saw no sign of any
steamer; nor could they tell exactly in which direction the sound
arose. One thought it came from one side, another thought it came
from the opposite quarter, while the others differed from these.
As for Captain Corbet, he said nothing, while the boys were
expressing their opinions loudly and confidently.
At last Bart appealed to Captain Corbet.
"Where is the steamer?"
"Down thar," said the captain, waving his hand over the stern.
"What steamer is it? the revenue steamer?"
"Not her. That revenoo steamer is up to Windsor by this time.
No; this is the St. John steamer coming up the bay, an I ony wish
she'd take us an give us a tow up."
"She seems to be close by."
"She is close by."
"Isn't there some danger that we'll be run down?"
As those words were spoken, another yell, louder, shriller, and
nearer than before, burst upon their ears. It seemed to be close
astern. The beat of the paddles was also near them.
"Pooty close!" said the captain.
"Isn't there some danger that we'll be run down?"
To this question, thus anxiously repeated, the captain answered
slowly,--
"Wal, thar may be, an then again thar mayn't. Ef a man tries to
dodge every possible danger in life, he'll have a precious hard
time of it. Why, men air killed in walkin the streets, or knocked
over by sun-strokes, as well as run down at sea. So what air we to
do? Do? Why, I jest do what I've allus ben a doin; I jest keep
right straight on my own course, and mind my own biz. Ten chances
to one they'll never come nigh us. I've heard steamers howlin
round me like all possessed, but I've never ben run down yet, an I
ain't goin to be at my time o' life. I don't blieve you'll see a
sign o' that thar steamer. You'll only hear her yellin--that's
all."
As he spoke another yell sounded.
"She's a passin us, over thar," said the captain, waving his hand
over the side. "Her whistle'll contenoo fainter till it stops. So
you better go below and take your sleep out."
The boys waited a little longer, and hearing the next whistle
sounding fainter, as Captain Corbet said, they followed his advice,
and were soon asleep, as before.
This time there was no further interruption, and they did not wake
till about eight in the morning, when they were summoned to
breakfast by Solomon.
On reaching the deck and looking around, a cry of joy went forth
from all. The fog was no longer to be seen, no longer did there
extend around them the wall of gloomy gray, shutting out all things
with its misty folds. No longer was the broad bay visible. They
found themselves now in a wide river, whose muddy waters bore them
slowly along. On one side was a shore, close by them, well wooded
in some places, and in others well cultivated, while on the other
side was another shore, equally fertile, extending far along.
"Here we air," cried Captain Corbet. "That wind served us well.
We've had a fust-rate run. I calc'lated we'd be three or four
days, but instead of that we've walked over in twenty-four hours.
Good agin!"
"Will we be able to land at Moncton soon?"
"Wal, no; not till the next tide."
"Why not?"
"Wal, this tide won't last long enough to carry us up thar, an so
we'll have to wait here. This is the best place thar is."
"What place is this?"
"Hillsborough."
"Hillsborough?"
"Yes. Do you see that thar pint?" and Captain Corbet waved his arm
towards a high, well-wooded promontory that jutted out into the
river.
"Yes."
"Wal, I'm goin in behind that, and I'll wait thar till the tide
turns. We'll get up to Moncton some time before evenin."
In a few minutes the Antelope was heading towards the promontory;
and soon she passed it, and advanced towards the shore. On passing
the promontory a sight appeared which at once attracted the whole
attention of the boys.
Immediately in front of them, in the sheltered place which was
formed by the promontory, was a little settlement, and on the bank
of the river was a ship-yard. Here there arose the stately outline
of a large ship. Her lower masts were in, she was decorated with
flags and streamers, and a large crowd was assembled in the yard
around her.
"There's going to be a launch!" cried Bart, to whom a scene like
this was familiar.
"A launch!" cried Bruce. "Hurrah! We'll be able to see it. I've
never seen one in my life. Now's the time."
"Can't we get ashore?" said Arthur.
"Of course," said Phil; "and perhaps they'll let us go on board and
be launched in her."
The very mention of such a thing increased the general excitement.
Captain Corbet was at once appealed to.
"O, thar's lots of time," said he. "Tain't quite high tide yet.
You'll have time to get ashore before she moves. Hullo, Wade!
Whar's that oar?"
The boys were all full of the wildest excitement, in the midst of
which Solomon appeared with the announcement that breakfast was
waiting.
To which Bart replied,--
"O, bother breakfast!"
"I don't want any," said Bruce.
"I have no appetite," said Arthur.
"Nor I," said Pat.
"I want to be on board that ship," said Phil.
"We can easily eat breakfast afterwards," said Tom.
At this manifest neglect of his cooking, poor Solomon looked quite
heart-broken; but Captain Corbet told him that he might bring the
things ashore, and this in some measure assuaged his grief.
It did not take long to get ready. The oar was flung on board the
boat, which had thus far been floating behind the schooner; and
though the boat had a little too much water on board to be
comfortable, yet no complaints were made, and in a few minutes they
were landed.
"How much time have we yet?" asked Bart, "before high tide?"
"O, you've got fifteen or twenty minutes," said Captain Corbet.
"Hurrah, boys! Come along," said Bart; and leading the way, he
went straight to the office.
As he approached it he uttered suddenly a cry of joy.
"What's the matter, Bart?"
Bart said nothing, but hurried forward, and the astonished boys saw
him shaking hands very vigorously with a gentleman who seemed like
the chief man on the place. He was an old acquaintance, evidently.
In a few minutes all was explained. As the boys came up, Bart
introduced them as his friends, and they were all warmly greeted;
after which the gentleman said,--
"Why, what a crowd of you there is! Follow me, now. There's
plenty of room for you, I imagine, in a ship of fifteen hundred
tons; and you've just come in time."
With these words he hurried off, followed by all the boys. He led
the way up an inclined plane which ran up to the bows of the ship,
and on reaching this place they went along a staging, and finally,
coming to a ladder, they clambered up, and found themselves on the
deck of the ship.
"I must leave you now, Bart, my boy," said the gentleman; "you go
to the quarter-deck and take care of yourselves. I must go down
again."
"Who in the world is he, Bart?" asked the boys, as they all stood
on the quarter-deck.
"Was there ever such luck!" cried Bart, joyously. "This is the
ship Sylph, and that is Mr. Watson, and he has built this ship for
my father. Isn't it odd that we should come to this place at this
particular time?"
"Why, it's as good as a play."
"Of course it is. I've known Mr. Watson all my life, and he's one
of the best men I ever met with. He was as glad to see me as I was
to see him."
But now the boys stopped talking, for the scene around them began
to grow exciting. In front of them was the settlement, and in the
yard below was a crowd who had assembled to see the launch. Behind
them was the broad expanse of the Petitcodiac River, beyond which
lay the opposite shore, which went back till it terminated in
wooded hills. Overhead arose the masts, adorned with a hundred
flags and streamers. The deck showed a steep slope from bow to
stern. But the scene around was nothing, compared with the
excitement of suspense, and expectation. In a few minutes the
hammers were to sound. In a few minutes the mighty fabric on which
they were standing would move, and take its plunge into the water.
The suspense made them hold their breath, and wait in perfect
silence.
Around them were a few men, who were talking in a commonplace way.
They were accustomed to launches, and an incident like this was as
nothing in their lives, though to the boys it was sufficient to
make their hearts throb violently, and deprive them of the power of
speech.
A few minutes passed.
"We ought to start soon," said Bart, in a whisper; for there was
something in the scene which made them feel grave and solemn.
The other boys nodded in silence.
A few minutes more passed.
Then there arose a cry.
And then suddenly there came to their excited ears the rattle of a
hundred hammers. Stroke after stroke, in quick succession, was
dealt upon the wedges, which thus raised the vast structure from
her resting-place. For a moment she stood motionless, and then--
Then with a slow motion, at first scarce perceptible, but which
every instant grew quicker, she moved down her ways, and plunged
like lightning into the water. The stern sank deep, then rose, and
then the ship darted through the water across the river. Then
suddenly the anchor was let go, and with the loud, sharp rattle of
chains, rushed to the bed of the river. With a slight jerk the
ship stopped.
The launch was over.
A boat now came from the shore, bringing the builder, Mr. Watson;
and at the same time a steamer appeared, rounding a point up the
river, and approaching them.
"Do you want to go to St. John, Bart?"
"Not just yet, sir," said Bart.
"Because if you do you can go down in the ship. The steamer is
going to take her in tow at once. But if you don't want to go, you
may go ashore in the boat. I'm sorry I can't stay here to show you
the country, my boy; but I have to go down in the ship, and at
once, for we can't lie here in the river, unless we want to be left
high and dry at low tide. So good by. Go to the house. Mrs.
Watson'll make you comfortable as long as you like; and if you want
to take a drive you may consider my horses your own."
With these words he shook hands with all the boys for good by, and
after seeing them safely on board the boat, he waited for the
steamer which was to tow the Sylph down the bay. The boys then
were rowed ashore. By the time they landed, the steamer had
reached the ship, a stout cable was passed on board and secured,
her anchor was weighed, and then, borne on by steam, and by the
tide, too, which had already turned, the Sylph, in tow of the
steamer, passed down the river, and was soon out of sight.
Bart then went to see Mrs. Watson, with all the boys. That lady,
like her husband, was an old acquaintance, and in the true spirit
of hospitality insisted on every one of them taking up their abode
with her for an indefinite period. Finding that they could not do
this, she prepared for them a bounteous breakfast, and then
persuaded them to go off for a drive through the country. This
invitation they eagerly accepted.
Before starting, they encountered Captain Corbet.
"Don't hurry back, boys," said he, "unless you very pertik'l'ry
wish to go up to Moncton by the arternoon tide. Don't mind me. I
got several things to occoopy me here."
"What time could we start up river?"
"Not before four."
"O, we'll be back by that time."
"Wal. Ony don't hurry back unless you like. I got to buy some
ship-bread, an I got to fix some things about the boat. It'll take
some time; so jest do as you like."
Being thus left to their own devices, and feeling quite unlimited
with regard to time, the boys started off in two wagons, and took a
long drive through the country. The time passed quickly, and they
enjoyed themselves so much that they did not get back until dusk.
"It's too late now, boys, to go up," said the captain, as he met
them on their return. "We've got to wait till next tide. It's
nearly high tide now."
"All right, captain; it'll do just as well to go up river to-
night."
"Amen," said the captain.
But now Mrs. Watson insisted on their staying to tea, and so it
happened that it was after nine o'clock before they were ready to
go on board the Antelope. Going down to the shore, they found the
boat ready, with some articles which Captain Corbet had procured.
"I've been fixing the gunwales," said he; "an here's a box of
pilot-bread. We were gettin out of provisions, an I've got in a
supply, an I've bought a bit of an old sail that'll do for a jib.
I'm afeard thar won't be room for all of us. Some of you better
stay ashore, an I'll come back."
"I'll wait," said Bart, taking his seat on a stick of timber.
"An I'll wait, too," said Bruce.
The other boys objected in a friendly way, but Bart and Bruce
insisted on waiting, and so the boat at length started, leaving
them behind.
In a short time it reached the schooner.
Captain Corbet secured the boat's painter to the stem, and threw
the oar on board.
"Now, boys, one of you stay in the boat, an pass up them things to
me--will you?"
"All right," said Tom. "I'll pass them up."
On this Captain Corbet got on board the schooner, followed by
Arthur, and Phil, and Pat. Tom waited in the boat.
"Now," said Captain Corbet, "lift up that thar box of pilot-bread
fust. 'Tain't heavy. We'll get these things out afore we go
ashore for the others."
"All right," said Tom.
He stooped, and took the box of biscuit in his arms.
At that time the tide was running down very fast, and the boat,
caught by the tide, was forced out from the schooner with such a
pressure that the rope was stiffened out straight.
Tom made one step forward. The next instant he fell down in the
bottom of the boat, and those on board of the schooner who were
looking at him saw, to their horror, that the boat was sweeping
away with the tide, far down the river.
V.
A Cry of Horror.--What shall we do?--Hard and fast.--Bart and
Bruce.--Gloomy Intelligence.--The Promontory.--The Bore of the
Petitcodiac.--A Night of Misery.--A mournful Waking.--Taking
Counsel.
A cry of horror escaped those on board, and for some time they
stood silent in utter dismay.
"The rope wasn't tied," groaned Arthur.
"Yes, it was," said Captain Corbet; "it bruk; catch me not tyin it.
It bruk; see here!" and he held up in the dim light the end of the
rope which still was fastened to the schooner. "I didn't know it
was rotten," he moaned; "'tain't over ten year old, that bit o'
rope, an I've had it an used it a thousand times without its ever
thinkin o' breakin."
"What can we do?" cried Arthur. "We must do something to save
him."
Captain Corbet shook his head.
"We've got no boat," said he.
"Boat! Who wants a boat?"
"What can we do without a boat?"
"Why, up anchor, and go after him with the schooner."
"The schooner's hard and fast," said Captain Corbet, mournfully.
"Hard and fast?"
"Yes; don't you notice how she leans? It's only a little, but
that's a sign that her keel's in the mud."
"I don't believe it! I won't believe it!" cried Arthur. "Come,
boys, up with the anchor."
As the boys rushed to the windlass, Captain Corbet went there, too,
followed by the mate, and they worked at it for some time, until at
last the anchor rose to the surface.
But the Antelope did not move. On the contrary, a still greater
list to one side, which was now unmistakable, showed that the
captain was right, and that she was actually, as he said, hard and
fast. This fact had to be recognized, but Arthur would not be
satisfied until he had actually seen the anchor, and then he knew
that the vessel was really aground.
"Do you mean to say," he cried at last, "that there is nothing to
be done?"
"I don't see," said Captain Corbet, "what thar is to be done till
the schewner muves."
"When will that be?"
"Not till to-morrow mornin."
"How early?"
"Not before eight o'clock."
"Eight o'clock!" cried Arthur, in horror.
"Yes, eight o'clock. You see we had to come in pooty nigh to the
shore, an it'll be eight o'clock before we're floated."
"And what'll become of poor Tom?" groaned Arthur.
"Wal," said the captain, "don't look on the wust. He may get
ashore."
"He has no oar. The oar was thrown aboard of the schooner."
"Still he may be carried ashore."
"Is there any chance?"
"Wal, not much, to tell the truth. Thar's no use of buo-oyin of
ourselves up with false hopes; not a mite. Thar's a better chance
of his bein picked up. That thar's likely now, an not unnatooral.
Let's all don't give up. If thar's no fog outside, I'd say his
chances air good."
"But it may be foggy."
"Then, in that case, he'll have to drift a while--sure."
"Then there's no hope."
"Hope? Who's a sayin thar's no hope? Why, look here; he's got
provisions on board, an needn't starve; so if he does float for a
day or two, whar's the harm? He's sure to be picked up
eventooally."
At this moment their conversation was interrupted by a loud call
from the promontory. It was the voice of Bruce.
While these events had been taking place on board the schooner,
Bruce and Bart had been ashore. At first they had waited patiently
for the return of the boat, but finally they wondered at her delay.
They had called, but the schooner was too far off to hear them.
Then they waited for what seemed to them an unreasonably long time,
wondering what kept the boat, until at length Bruce determined to
try and get nearer. Burt was to stay behind in case the boat
should come ashore in his absence. With this in view he had walked
down the promontory until he had reached the extreme point, and
there he found himself within easy hail of the Antelope.
"Schooner ahoy!" he cried.
"A-ho-o-o-o-y!" cried Captain Corbet.
"Why don't you come and take us off?" he cried.
After this there was silence for some time. At last Captain Corbet
shouted out,--
"The boat's lost."
"What!"
"The boat's adrift."
Captain Corbet said nothing about Tom, from a desire to spare him
for the present. So Bruce thought that the empty boat had drifted
off, and as he had been prepared to hear of some accident, he was
not much surprised.
But he was not to remain long in ignorance. In a few moments he
heard Arthur's voice.
"Bruce!"
"Hallo!"
"The boat's gone."
"All right."
"TOM'S ADRIFT IN HER!"
"What!" shouted Bruce.
"TOM'S ADRIFT IN HER."
At this appalling intelligence Bruce's heart seemed to stop beating.
"How long?" he dried, after a pause.
"Half an hour," cried Arthur.
"Why don't you go after him?" cried Bruce again.
"We're aground," cried Arthur.
The whole situation was now explained, and Bruce was filled with
his own share of that dismay which prevailed on board of the
schooner; for a long time nothing more was said. At length
Arthur's voice sounded again.
"Bruce!"
"Hallo!"
"Get a boat, and come aboard as soon as you can after the tide
turns."
"All right. How early will the tide suit?"
"Eight o'clock."
"Not before?"
"No."
After this nothing more was said. Bruce could see for himself that
the tide was falling, and that he would have to wait for the
returning tide before a boat could be launched. He waited for some
time, full of despair, and hesitating to return to Bart with his
mournful intelligence. At length he turned, and walked slowly back
to his friend.
"Well, Bruce?" asked Bart, who by this time was sure that some
accident had happened.
"The boat's adrift."
"The boat!"
"Yes; and what's worse, poor Tom!"
"Tom!" cried Bart, in a horror of apprehension.
"Yes, Tom's adrift in her."
At this Bart said not a word, but stood for some time staring at
Bruce in utter dismay.
A few words served to explain to Bart the situation of the
schooner, and the need of getting a boat.
"Well," said Bart, "we'd better see about it at once. It's eleven
o'clock, but we'll find some people up; if not, we'll knock them
up."
And with these words the two lads walked up from the river bank.
On reaching the houses attached to the shipyard, they found that
most of the people were up. There was a good deal of singing and
laughter going on, which the boys interpreted to arise from a
desire to celebrate the launching of the ship. They went first to
Mrs. Watson's house, where they found that good lady up. She
listened to their story with undisguised uneasiness, and afterwards
called in a number of men, to whom she told the sad news. These
men listened to it with very serious faces.
"It's no joke," said one, shaking his head. The others said
nothing, but their faces spoke volumes.
"What had we better do?" asked Bruce.
"Of course ye'll be off as soon as ye can get off," said one.
"The lad might have a chance," said another. "The return tide may
drift him back, but he may be carried too far down for that."
"He'll be carried below Cape Chignecto unless he gets to the land,"
said another.
"Isn't there a chance that he'll be picked up?" asked Bart.
The man to whom he spoke shook his head.
"There's a deal of fog in the bay this night," said he.
"Fog? Why, it's clear enough here."
"So it is; but this place and the Bay of Fundy are two different
things."
"A regular sou-wester out there," said another man.
"An a pooty heavy sea by this time," said another.
And in this way they all contributed to increase the anxiety of the
two boys, until at last scarce a ray of hope was left.
"You'd better prepare yourselves for the worst," said one of the
men. "If he had an oar he would be all right; but, as it is--well,
I don't care about sayin what I think."
"O, you're all too despondent," said Mrs. Watson. "What is the use
of looking on the dark side? Come, Bart, cheer up. I'll look on
the bright side. Hope for the best. Set out on the search with
hope, and a good heart. I'm confident that he will be safe. You
will pick him up yourselves, or else you will hear of his escape
somewhere. I remember two men, a few years ago, that went adrift
and were saved."
"Ay," said one of the men, "I mind that well. They were Tom
Furlong and Jim Spencer. But that there boat was a good-sized
fishing boat; an such a boat as that might ride out a gale."
"Nonsense," said Mrs. Watson. "You're all a set of confirmed
croakers. Why, Bart, you've read enough shipwreck books to know
that little boats have floated in safety for hundreds of miles. So
hope for the best; don't be down-hearted. I'll send two or three
men down now to get the boat ready for you. You can't do anything
till the morning, you know. Won't you stay here? You had better
go to bed at once."
But Bart and Bruce could not think of bed.
"Well, come back any time, and a bed will be ready for you," said
Mrs. Watson. "If you want to see about the boat now, the men are
ready to go with you."
With those words she led the way out to the kitchen, where a couple
of men were waiting. Bart and Bruce followed them down to a boat-
house on the river bank, and saw the boat there which Mrs. Watson
had offered them. This boat could be launched at any time, and as
there was nothing more to be done, the boys strolled disconsolately
about, and finally went to the end of the promontory, and spent a
long time looking out over the water, and conversing sadly about
poor Tom's chances.
There they sat late in the night, until midnight came, and so on
into the morning. At last the scene before them changed from a
sheet of water to a broad expanse of mud. The water had all
retired, leaving the bed of the river exposed.
Of all the rivers that flow into the Bay of Fundy none is more
remarkable than the Petitcodiac. At high tide it is full--a mighty
stream; at low tide it is empty--a channel of mud forty miles long;
and the intervening periods are marked by the furious flow of
ascending or descending waters.
And now, as the boys sat there looking out upon the expanse of mud
before them, they became aware of a dull, low, booming sound, that
came up from a far distant point, and seemed like the voice of many
waters sounding from the storm-vexed bay outside. There was no
moon, but the light was sufficient to enable them to see the
exposed riverbed, far over to the shadowy outline of the opposite
shore. Here, where in the morning a mighty ship had floated,
nothing could now float; but the noise that broke upon their ears
told them of the return of the waters that now were about to pour
onward with resistless might into the empty channel, and send
successive waves far along into the heart of the land.
"What is that noise?" asked Bruce. "It grows louder and louder."
"That," said bart, "is the Bore of the Petitcodiac."
"Have you ever seen it?"
"Never. I've heard of it often, but have never seen it."
But their words were interrupted now by the deepening thunder of
the approaching waters. Towards the quarter whence the sound arose
they turned their heads involuntarily. At first they could see
nothing through the gloom of night; but at length, as they strained
their eyes looking down the river, they saw in the distance a
faint, white, phosphorescent gleam, and as it appeared the roar
grew louder, and rounder, and more all-pervading. On it came,
carrying with it the hoarse cadence of some vast surf flung ashore
from the workings of a distant storm, or the thunder of some mighty
cataract tumbling over a rocky precipice.
And now, as they looked, the white, phosphorescent glow grew
brighter, and then whiter, like snow; every minute it approached
nearer, until at last, full before them and beneath them, there
rolled a giant wave, extending across the bed of the river,
crescent-shaped, with its convex side advancing forwards, and its
ends following after within short distance from the shore. The
great wave rolled on, one mass of snow-white foam, behind which
gleamed a broad line of phosphorescent lustre from the agitated
waters, which, in the gloom of night, had a certain baleful
radiance. As it passed on its path, the roar came up more
majestically from the foremost wave; and behind that came the roar
of other billows that followed in its wake. By daylight the scene
would have been grand and impressive; but now, amid the gloom, the
grandeur became indescribable. The force of those mighty waters
seemed indeed resistless, and it was with a feeling of relief that
the boys reflected that the schooner was out of the reach of its
sweep. Its passage was swift, and soon it had passed beyond them;
and afar up the river, long after it had passed from sight, they
heard the distant thunder of its mighty march.
By the time the wave had passed, the boys found themselves
excessively weary with their long wakefulness.
"Bart, my boy," said Bruce, "we must get some rest, or we won't be
worth anything to-morrow. What do you say? Shall we go back to
Mrs. Watson's?"
"It's too late--isn't it?"
"Well, it's pretty late, no doubt. I dare say it's half past two;
but that's all the more reason why we should go to bed."
"Well."
"What do you say? Do you think we had better disturb Mrs. Watson,
or not?"
"O, no; let's go into the barn, and lie down in the hay."
"Very well. Hay makes a capital bed. For my part, I could sleep
on stones."
"So could I."
"I'm determined to hope for the best about Tom," said Bruce, rising
and walking off, followed by Bart. "Mrs. Watson was right.
There's no use letting ourselves be downcast by a lot of croakers--
is there?"
"No," said Bart.
The boys then walked on, and in a few minutes reached the ship-
yard.
Here a man came up to them.
"We've been looking for you everywhere," said the man. "Mrs.
Watson is anxious about you."
"Mrs. Watson?"
"Yes. She won't go to bed till you get back to the house. There's
another man out for you, up the river."
"O, I'm sorry we have given you all so much trouble," said Bart;
"but we didn't think that anybody would bother themselves about
us."
"Well, you don't know Mrs. Watson that's all," said the man,
walking along with them. "She's been a worrytin herself to death
about you; and the sooner she sees you, the better for her and for
you."
On reaching the house the boys were received by Mrs. Watson. One
look at her was enough to show them that the man's account of her
was true. Her face was pale, her manner was agitated, and her
voice trembled as she spoke to them, and asked them where they had
been.
Bart expressed sorrow at having been the cause of so much trouble,
and assured her he thought that she had gone to bed.
"No," said she; "I've been too excited and agitated about your
friend and about you. But I'm glad that you've been found; and as
it's too late to talk now, you had better go to bed, and try to
sleep."
With these words she gently urged them to their bedroom; and the
boys, utterly worn out, did not attempt to withstand her. They
went to bed, and scarcely had their heads touched the pillows
before they were fast asleep.
Meanwhile the boys on board the Antelope had been no less anxious;
and, unable to sleep, they had talked solemnly with each other over
the possible fate of poor Tom. Chafing from their forced inaction,
they looked impatiently upon the ebbing water, which was leaving
them aground, when they were longing to be floating on its bosom
after their friend, and could scarcely endure the thought of the
suspense to which they would be condemned while waiting for the
following morning.
Captain Corbet also was no less anxious, though much less agitated.
He acknowledged, with pain, that it was all his fault, but,
appealed to all the boys, one by one, asking them how he should
know that the rope was rotten. He informed them that the rope was
an old favorite of his, and that he would have willingly risked his
life on it. He blamed himself chiefly, however, for not staying in
the boat himself, instead of leaving Tom in it. To all his remarks
the boys said but little, and contented themselves with putting
questions to him about the coast, the tides, the wind, the
currents, and the fog.
The boys on board went to sleep about one o'clock, and waked at
sunrise. Then they watched the shore wistfully, and wondered why
Bart and Bruce did not make their appearance. But Bart and Bruce,
worn out by their long watch, did not wake till nearly eight
o'clock. Then they hastily dressed themselves, and after a very
hurried breakfast they bade good by to good Mrs. Watson.
"I shall be dreadfully anxious about that poor boy," said she,
sadly. "Promise me to telegraph as soon as you can about the
result."
Bart promised.
Then they hurried down to the beach. The tide was yet a
considerable distance out; but a half dozen stout fellows, whose
sympathies were fully enlisted in their favor, shoved the boat down
over the mud, and launched her.
Then Bart and Bruce took the oars, and soon reached the schooner,
where the boys awaited their arrival in mournful silence.
VI.
Tom adrift.--The receding Shores.--The Paddle.--The Roar of Surf--
The Fog Horn.--The Thunder of the unseen Breakers.--A Horror of
great Darkness.--Adrift in Fog and Night.
When the boat in which Tom was darted down the stream, he at first
felt paralyzed by utter terror; but at length rousing himself, he
looked around. As the boat drifted on, his first impulse was to
stop it; and in order to do this it was necessary to find an oar.
The oar which Captain Corbet had used to scull the boat to the
schooner had been thrown on board of the latter, so that the
contents of the boat might be passed up the more conveniently. Tom
knew this, but he thought that there might be another oar on board.
A brief examination sufficed to show him that there was nothing of
the kind. A few loose articles lay at the bottom; over these was
the sail which Captain Corbet had bought in the ship-yard, and on
this was the box of pilot-bread. That was all. There was not a
sign of an oar, or a board, or anything of the kind.
No sooner had he found out this than he tried to tear off one of
the seats of the boat, in the hope of using this as a paddle. But
the seats were too firmly fixed to be loosened by his hands, and,
after a few frantic but ineffectual efforts, he gave up the
attempt.
But he could not so quickly give up his efforts to save himself.
There was the box of biscuit yet. Taking his knife from his
pocket, he succeeded in detaching the cover of the box, and then,
using this as a paddle, he sought with frantic efforts to force the
boat nearer to the shore. But the tide was running very swiftly,
and the cover was only a small bit of board, so that his efforts
seemed to have but little result. He did indeed succeed in turning
the boat's head around; but this act, which was not accomplished
without the severest labor, did not seem to bring her nearer to the
shore to any perceptible extent. What he sought to do was to
achieve some definite motion to the boat, which might drag her out
of the grasp of the swift current; but that was the very thing
which he could not do, for so strong was that grasp, and so swift
was that current, that even an oar would have scarcely accomplished
what he wished. The bit of board, small, and thin, and frail, and
wielded with great difficulty and at a fearful disadvantage, was
almost useless.
But, though he saw that he was accomplishing little or nothing, he
could not bring himself to give up this work. It seemed his only
hope; and so he labored on, sometimes working with both hands at
the board, sometimes plying his frail paddle with one hand, and
using the other hand at a vain endeavor to paddle in the water. In
his desperation he kept on, and thought that if he gained ever so
little, still, by keeping hard at work, the little that he gained
might finally tell upon the direction of the boat--at any rate, so
long as it might be in the river. He knew that the river ran for
some miles yet, and that some time still remained before he would
reach the bay.
Thus Tom toiled on, half despairing, and nearly fainting with his
frenzied exertion, yet still refusing to give up, but plying his
frail paddle until his nerveless arms seemed like weights of lead,
and could scarce carry the board through the water. But the
result, which at the outset, and in the very freshness of his
strength, had been but trifling, grew less and less against the
advance of his own weakness and the force of that tremendous tide,
until at last his feeble exertions ceased to have any appreciable
effect whatever.
There was no moon, but it was light enough for him to see the
shores--to see that he was in the very centre of that rapid
current, and to perceive that he was being borne past those dim
shores with fearful velocity. The sight filled him with despair,
but his arms gained a fresh energy, from time to time, out of the
very desperation of his soul. He was one of those natures which
are too obstinate to give up even in the presence of despair
itself; and which, even when hope is dead, still forces hope to
linger, and struggles on while a particle of life or of strength
remains. So, as he toiled on, and fought on, against this fate
which had suddenly fixed itself upon him, he saw the shores on
either side recede, and knew that every passing moment was bearing
him on to a wide, a cruel, and a perilous sea. He took one hasty
glance behind him, and saw what he knew to be the mouth of the
river close at hand; and beyond this a waste of waters was hidden
in the gloom of night. The sight lent new energy to his fainting
limbs. He called aloud for help. Shriek after shriek burst from
him, and rang wildly, piercingly, thrillingly upon the air of
night. But those despairing shrieks came to no human ear, and met
with no response. They died away upon the wind and the waters; and
the fierce tide, with swifter flow, bore him onward.
The last headland swept past him; the river and the river bank were
now lost to him. Around him the expanse of water grew darker, and
broader, and more terrible. Above him the stars glimmered more
faintly from the sky. But the very habit of exertion still
remained, and his faint plunges still dipped the little board into
the water; and a vague idea of saving himself was still uppermost
in his mind. Deep down in that stout heart of his was a desperate
resolution never to give up while strength lasted; and well he
sustained that determination. Over him the mist came floating,
borne along by the wind which sighed around him; and that mist
gradually overspread the scene upon which his straining eyes were
fastened. It shut out the overhanging sky. It extinguished the
glimmering stars. It threw a veil over the receding shores. It
drew its folds around him closer and closer, until at last
everything was hidden from view. Closer and still closer came the
mist, and thicker and ever thicker grew its dense folds, until at
last even the water, into which he still thrust his frail paddle,
was invisible. At length his strength failed utterly. His hands
refused any longer to perform their duty. The strong, indomitable
will remained, but the power of performing the dictates of that
will was gone. He fell back upon the sail that lay in the bottom
of the boat, and the board fell from his hands.
And now there gathered around the prostrate figure of the lost boy
all the terrors of thickest darkness. The fog came, together with
the night, shrouding all things from view, and he was floating over
a wide sea, with an impenetrable wall of thickest darkness closing
him in on all sides.
As he thus lay there helpless, he had leisure to reflect for the
first time upon the full bitterness of his situation. Adrift in
the fog, and in the night, and borne onward swiftly down into the
Bay of Fundy--that was his position. And what could he do? That
was the one question which he could not answer. Giving way now to
the rush of despair, he lay for some time motionless, feeling the
rocking of the waves, and the breath of the wind, and the chill
damp of the fog, yet unable to do anything against these enemies.
For nearly an hour he lay thus inactive, and at the end of that
time his lost energies began to return. He rose and looked around.
The scene had not changed at all; in fact, there was no scene to
change. There was nothing but black darkness all around. Suddenly
something knocked against the boat. He reached out his hand, and
touched a piece of wood, which the next instant slipped from his
grasp. But the disappointment was not without its alleviation, for
he thought that he might come across some bits of drift wood, with
which he could do something, perhaps, for his escape. And so
buoyant was his soul, and so obstinate his courage, that this
little incident of itself served to revive his faculties. He went
to the stern of the boat, and sitting there, he tried to think upon
what might be best to be done.
What could be done in such a situation? He could swim, but of what
avail was that? In what direction could he swim, or what progress
could he make, with such a tide? As to paddling, he thought of
that no more; paddling was exhausted, and his board was useless.
Nothing remained, apparently, but inaction. Inaction was indeed
hard, and it was the worst condition in which he could be placed,
for in such a state the mind always preys upon itself; in such a
state trouble is always magnified, and the slow time passes more
slowly. Yet to this inaction he found himself doomed.
He floated on now for hours, motionless and filled with despair,
listening to the dash of the waves, which were the only sounds that
came to his ears. And so it came to pass, in process of time, that
by incessant attention to these monotonous sounds, they ceased to
be altogether monotonous, but seemed to assume various cadences and
intonations. His sharpened ears learned at last to distinguish
between the dash of large waves and the plash of small ones, the
sighing of the wind, the pressure of the waters against the boat's
bows, and the ripple of eddies under its stern. Worn out by
excitement and fatigue, he lay motionless, listening to sounds like
these, and taking in them a mournful interest, when suddenly, in
the midst of them, his ears caught a different cadence. It was a
long, measured sound, not an unfamiliar one, but one which he had
often heard--the gathering sound which breaks out, rising and
accumulating upon the ear, as the long line of surf falls upon some
rocky shore. He knew at once what this was, and understood by it
that he was near some shore; but what shore it might be he could
not know. The sound came up from his right, and therefore might be
the New Brunswick coast, if the boat had preserved its proper
position. But the position of the boat had been constantly
changing as she drifted along, so that it was impossible to tell
whether he was drifting stern foremost or bow foremost. The water
moved as the boat moved, and there was no means by which to judge.
He listened to the surf, therefore, but made no attempt to draw
nearer to it. He now knew perfectly well that with his present
resources no efforts of his could avail anything, and that his only
course would be to wait. Besides, this shore, whatever it was,
must be very different, he thought, from the banks of the
Petitcodiac. It was, as he thought, an iron-bound shore. And the
surf which he heard broke in thunder a mile away, at the foot of
giant precipices, which could only offer death to the hapless
wretch who might be thrown among them. He lay, therefore,
inactive, listening to this rolling surf for hours. At first it
grew gradually louder, as though he was approaching it; but
afterwards it grew fainter quite as gradually, until at length it
could no longer be heard.
During all these lonely hours, one thing afforded a certain
consolation, and that was, the discovery that the sea did not grow
rougher. The wind that blew was the sou-wester, the dreaded wind
of fog and, storm; but on this occasion its strength was not put
forth; it blew but moderately, and the water was not very greatly
disturbed. The sea tossed the little boat, but was not high enough
to dash over her, or to endanger her in any way. None of its spray
ever came upon the recumbent form in the boat, nor did any moisture
come near him, save that which was deposited by the fog. At first,
in his terror, he had counted upon meeting a tempestuous sea; but,
as the hours passed, he saw that thus far there had been nothing of
the kind, and, if he were destined to be exposed to such a danger,
it lay as yet in the future. As long as the wind continued
moderate, so long would he toss over the little waves without being
endangered in any way. And thus, with all these thoughts,
sometimes depressing, at other times rather encouraging, he drifted
on.
Hours passed away.
At length his fatigue overpowered him more and more, and as he sat
there in the stern, his eyes closed, and his head fell heavily
forward. He laid it upon the sail which was in front of him, so as
to get an easier position, and was just closing his eyes again,
when a sound came to his ears which in an instant drove every
thought of sleep and of fatigue away, and made him start up and
listen with intense eagerness.
It was the sound of a fog horn, such as is used by coasting
vessels, and blown during a fog, at intervals, to give warning of
their presence. The sound was a familiar one to a boy who had been
brought up on the fog-encircled and fish-haunted shores of
Newfoundland; and Tom's hearing, which had been almost hushed in
slumber, caught it at once. It was like the voice of a friend
calling to him. But for a moment he thought it was only a fancy,
or a dream, and he sat listening and quivering with excitement. He
waited and listened for some time, and was just about to conclude
that it was a dream, when suddenly it came again. There was no
mistake this time. It was a fog horn. Some schooner was sailing
these waters. O for day-light, and O for clear weather, so that he
might see it, and make himself seen! The sound, though clear, was
faint, and the schooner was evidently at a considerable distance;
but Tom, in his eagerness, did not think of that. He shouted with
all his strength. He waited for an answer, and then shouted again.
Once more he waited, and listened, and then again and again his
screams went forth over the water. But still no response came. At
last, after some interval, the fog horn again sounded. Again Tom
screamed, and yelled, and uttered every sound that could possibly
convey to human ears an idea of his presence, and of his distress.
The sounds of the fog horn, however, did not correspond with his
cries. It was blown at regular intervals, which seemed painfully
long to Tom, and did not seem to sound as if in answer to him. At
first his hope was sustained by the discovery that the sounds were
louder, and therefore nearer; but scarcely had he assured himself
of this, when he perceived that they were growing fainter again, as
though the schooner had approached him, and then sailed away. This
discovery only stimulated him to more frantic exertions. He yelled
more and more loudly, and was compelled, at last, to cease from
pure exhaustion. But even then he did not cease till long after
the last notes of the departing fog horn had faintly sounded in his
ears.
It was a disappointment bitter indeed, since it came after a
reviving hope. What made it all the worse was a fixed idea which
he had, that the schooner was no other than the Antelope. He felt
confident that she had come at once after him, and was now
traversing the waters in search of him, and sounding the horn so as
to send it to his ears and get his response. And his response had
been given with this result! This was the end of his hopes. He
could bear it no longer. The stout heart and the resolute
obstinacy which had so long struggled against fate now gave way
utterly. He buried his face in his hands, and burst into a passion
of tears.
He wept for a long time, and roused himself, at last, with
difficulty, to a dull despair. What was the use of hoping, or
thinking, or listening? Hope was useless. It was better to let
himself go wherever the waters might take him. He reached out his
hand and drew the sail forward, and then settling himself down in
the stern of the boat, he again shut his eyes and tried to sleep.
But sleep, which a short time before had been so easy, was now
difficult. His ears took in once more the different sounds of the
sea, and soon became aware of a deeper, drearer sound than any
which had hitherto come to him. It was the hoarse roar of a great
surf, far more formidable than the one which he had heard before.
The tumult and the din grew rapidly louder, and at length became
so terrific that he sat upright, and strained his eyes in the
direction from which it came. Peering thus through the darkness,
he saw the glow of phosphorescent waves wrought out of the strife
of many waters; and they threw towards him, amid the darkness, a
baleful gleam which fascinated his eyes. A feeling came to him now
that all was over. He felt, as though he were being sucked into
some vortex, where Death lay in wait for him. He trembled. A
prayer started to his lips, and burst from him. Suddenly his boat
seemed caught by some resistless force, and jerked to one side; the
next instant it rose on some swelling wave, and was shot swiftly
forward. Tom closed his eyes, and a thrill of horror passed
through every nerve. All at once a rude shock was felt, and the
boat shook, and Tom thought he was going down. It seemed like the
blow of a rock, and he could think only of the ingulfing waters.
But the waters hesitated to claim their prey; the rushing motion
ceased; and soon the boat was tossing lightly, as before, over the
waves, while the hoarse and thunderous roar of those dread unseen
breakers, from which he had been so wondrously saved, arose
wrathfully behind, as though they were howling after their escaped
victim. A cry of gratitude escaped Tom, and with trembling lips he
offered a heart-felt prayer to that divine Power whose mighty hand
had just rescued him from a terrible doom.
Tom's agitation had been so great that it was long before he could
regain his former calm. At last, however, his trembling subsided.
He heard no longer the howling surf. All was calm and quiet. The
wind ceased, the boat's motion was less violent, the long-resisted
slumber came once more to his eyes. Still his terror kept off
sleep, and as his eyes would close, they would every moment open
again, and he would start in terror and look around.
At length he saw that the darkness was less profound. Light was
coming, and that light was increasing. He could see the dark
waters, and the gloomy folds of the enclosing mist became apparent.
He gave a heavy sigh, partly of terror at the thought of all that
he had gone through, and partly of relief at the approach of light.
Well might he sigh, for this light was the dawn of a new day, and
showed him that he had been a whole night upon the waters.
And now he could no longer struggle against sleep. His eyes closed
for the last time. His head fell forward on the wet sail.
He was sound asleep.
VII.
Lost in the Fog.--The Shoal and its Rocks.--Is it a Reef?--The
Truth.--Hoisting Sail.--A forlorn Hope.--Wild Steering.--Where am
I?--Land, ho!
Tom slept for many hours; and when he at length awoke, he was
stiffened in every limb, and wet to the skin. It was his
constrained position and the heavy fog which had done this. He sat
up and looked around with a bewildered air; but it did not take a
long time for him to collect his wandering faculties, and arrive at
the full recollection of his situation. Gradually it all came
before him--the night of horror, the long drift, the frantic
struggles, the boom of the surf, the shrill, penetrating tone of
the fog horn, his own wild screams for help, the thunder of the
breakers, and the grasp of the giant wave; all these, and many
more, came back to his mind; and he was all too soon enabled to
connect his present situation with the desperate position of the
preceding night.
In spite of all these gloomy thoughts, which thus rushed in one
accumulated mass over his soul, his first impulse had nothing to do
with these things, but was concerned with something very different
from useless retrospect, and something far more essential. He
found himself ravenously hungry; and his one idea was to satisfy
the cravings of his appetite.
He thought at once of the box of biscuit.
The sail which he had pulled forward had very fortunately covered
it up, else the contents might have been somewhat damaged. As it
was, the upper edges of the biscuits, which had been exposed before
being covered by the sail, were somewhat damp and soft, but
otherwise they were not harmed; and Tom ate his frugal repast with
extreme relish. Satisfying his appetite had the natural effect of
cheering his spirits, and led him to reflect with thankfulness on
the very fortunate presence of that box of biscuit in the boat.
Had it not been for that, how terrible would his situation be! But
with that he could afford to entertain hope, and might reasonably
expect to endure the hardships of his situation. Strange to say,
he was not at all thirsty; which probably arose from the fact that
he was wet to the skin.
Immersing one's self in water is often resorted to by shipwrecked
mariners, when they cannot get a drink, and with successful
results. As for Tom, his whole night had been one long bath, in
which he had been exposed to the penetrating effects of the sea air
and the fog.
He had no idea whatever of the time. The sun could not be seen,
and so thick was the fog that he could not even make out in what
part of the sky it might be. He had a general impression, however,
that it was midday; and this impression was not very much out of
the way. His breakfast refreshed him, and he learned now to attach
so much value to his box of biscuit, that his chief desire was to
save it from further injury. So he hunted about for the cover, and
finding it underneath the other end of the sail, he put it on the
box, and then covered it all up. In this position the precious
contents of the box were safe.
The hour of the day was a subject of uncertainty, and so was the
state of the tide. Whether he was drifting up or down the bay he
could not tell for certain. His recollection of the state of the
tide at Petitcodiac, was but vague. He reckoned, however, from the
ship launch of the preceding day, and then, allowing sufficient
time for the difference in the tide, he approximated to a correct
conclusion. If it were midday, he thought that the tide would be
about half way down on the ebb.
These thoughts, and acts, and calculations took up some time, and
he now began to look around him. Suddenly his eye caught sight of
something not far away, dimly visible through the mist. It looked
like a rock. A farther examination showed him that such was the
case. It was a rock, and he was drifting towards it. No sooner
had he ascertained this, than all his excitement once more
awakened. Trembling from head to foot at this sudden prospect of
escape, he started to his feet, and watched most eagerly the
progress of the boat. It was drifting nearer to the rock. Soon
another appeared, and then another. The rocks were black, and
covered with masses of sea-weed, as though they were submerged at
high tide. A little nearer, and he saw a gravelly strand lying
just beyond the rocks. His excitement grew stronger and stronger,
until at last it was quite uncontrollable. He began to fear that
he would drift past this place, into the deep water again. He
sprang into the bows, and grasping the rope in his hand, stood
ready to leap ashore. He saw that he was drawing nearer, and so
delayed for a while. Nearer he came and nearer. At length the
boat seemed to pass along by the gravelly beach, and move by it as
though it would go no nearer. This Tom could not endure. He
determined to wait no longer. He sprang.
He sank into the water up to his armpits, but he did not lose his
hold of the rope. Clutching this in a convulsive grasp, he
regained his foothold, which he had almost lost, and struggled
forward. For a few moments he made no headway, for the boat, at
the pressure of the current, pulled so hard that he could not drag
it nearer. A terrible fear came to him that the rope might break.
Fortunately it did not, and, after a short but violent struggle,
Tom conquered the resistance of the tide, and pulled the boat
slowly towards the shore. He then towed it near to the rocks,
dragged its bows up as far as he could, and fastened it securely.
Then he looked around.
A few rocks were near him, about six feet high, jutting out of the
gravel; and beyond these were others, which rose out of the water.
Most of them were covered with sea-weed. A few sticks of timber
were wedged in the interstices of the nearest rocks. As to the
rest, he saw only a rocky ledge of small extent, which was
surrounded by water. Beyond this nothing was visible but fog.
At first he had thought that this was a beach, but now he began to
doubt this. He walked all around, and went into the water on every
side, but found no signs of any neighboring shore. The place
seemed rather like some isolated ledge. But where was it, and how
far away was the shore? If he could only tell that! He stopped,
and listened intently; he walked all around, and listened more
intently still, in hopes of hearing the sound of some neighboring
surf. In vain. Nothing of the kind came to his ears. All was
still. The water was not rough, nor was there very much wind.
There was only a brisk breeze, which threw up light waves on the
surface.
After a time he noticed that the tide was going down, and the area
of the ledge was evidently enlarging. This inspired hope, for he
thought that perhaps some long shoal might be disclosed by the
retreating tide, which might communicate with the main land. For
this he now watched intently, and occupied himself with measuring
the distance from the rock where his boat was tied. Doing this
from time to time, he found that every little while the number of
paces between the rock and the water's edge increased. This
occupation made the time pass rapidly; and at last Tom found his
stopping-place extending over an area of about a hundred yards in
length, and half as many in breadth. The rocks at one end had
increased in apparent size, and in number; but the ledge itself
remained unchanged in its general character.
This, he saw, was its extreme limit, beyond which it did not
extend. There was no communication with any shore. There was no
more indication now of land than when he had first arrived. This
discovery was a gradual one. It had been heralded by many fears
and suspicions, so that at last, when it forced itself on his
convictions, he was not altogether unprepared. Still, the shock
was terrible, and once more poor Tom had to struggle with his
despair--a despair, too, that was all the more profound from the
hopes that he had been entertaining. He found, at length, in
addition to this, that the tide was rising, that it was advancing
towards his resting-place, and that it would, no doubt, overflow it
all before long. It had been half tide when he landed, and but a
little was uncovered; at full tide he saw that it would all be
covered up by the water,--sea weed, rocks, and all,--and concealed
from human eye.
In the midst of these painful discoveries there suddenly occurred
to him the true name and nature of this place.
Quaco Ledge!
That was the place which Captain Corbet had described. He recalled
now the full description. Here it lay before him; upon it he
stood; and he found that it corresponded in every respect with the
description that the captain had given. If this were indeed so,
and the description were true,--and he could not doubt this,--how
desperate his situation was, and how he had been deceived in his
false hopes! Far, far away was he from any shore!--in the middle
of the bay; on a place avoided by all--a place which he should shun
above all other places if he hoped for final escape!
And now he was as eager to quit this ill-omened place as he had
once been to reach it. The tide was yet low. He tried to push the
boat down, but could not. He saw that he would have to wait. So
he got inside the boat, and, sitting down, he waited patiently.
The time passed slowly, and Tom looked despairingly out over the
water. Something attracted his attention. It was a long pole,
which had struck against the edge of the shoal. He got out of the
boat, and, securing it, he walked back again. It was some waif
that had been drifting about till it was thus cast at his feet. He
thought of taking it for a mast, and making use of the sail. The
idea was an attractive one. He pulled the sail out, unfolded it,
and found it to be the jib of some schooner. He cut off one end of
this, and then with his knife began to make a hole in the seat for
his mast. It was very slow work, but he succeeded at last in doing
it, and inserted the pole. Then he fastened the sail to it. He
was rather ignorant of navigation, but he had a general idea of the
science, and thought he would learn by experience. By cutting off
the rope from the edge of the sail he obtained a sheet, and taking
off the cover of the biscuit box a second time, he put this aside
to use as a rudder.
But now, in what direction ought he to steer?
This was an insoluble problem. He could tell now by the flow of
the current the points of the compass, but could not tell in which
direction he ought to go. The New Brunswick coast he thought was
nearest, but he dreaded it. It seemed perilous and unapproachable.
He did not think much better of the Nova Scotia coast. He thought
rather of Cape d'Or, as a promising place of refuge, or the
Petitcodiac. So, after long deliberation, he decided on steering
back again, especially as the wind was blowing directly up the bay.
By the time that he had finished these preparations and deliberations
the boat was afloat. Eagerly Tom pushed it away from the shoal;
eagerly, and with trembling hands, he let the sail unfold, and
thrust the board into the water astern. The boat followed the
impulse of the wind, and the young sailor saw with delight that his
experiment was successful, and before long the dark rocks of Quaco
Ledge were lost to view.
Now, where there is a definite object to steer by, or a compass to
guide one, and a decent rudder, even an inexperienced hand can
manage to come somewhere near the point that he aims at. But take
a boat like Tom's, and a rude and suddenly extemporized sail, with
no other rudder than a bit of board, with no compass, and a
surrounding of thick fog, and it would puzzle even an experienced
sailor to guide himself aright. Tom soon suspected that his course
was rather a wild one; his board in particular became quite
unmanageable, and he was fatigued with trying to hold it in the
water. So he threw it aside, and boldly trusted to his sail alone.
The boat seemed to him to be making very respectable progress. The
wind was fresh, and the sea only moderate. The little waves beat
over the bows, and there was quite a commotion astern. Tom thought
he was doing very well, and heading as near as possible towards the
Petitcodiac. Besides, in his excitement at being thus saved from
mere blind drifting, he did not much care where he went, for he
felt assured that he was now on the way out of his difficulties.
In an hour or two after leaving the ledge it grew quite dark, and
Tom saw that it would be necessary to prepare for the night. His
preparations were simple, consisting in eating a half dozen
biscuit. He now began to feel a little thirsty, but manfully
struggled against this feeling. Gradually the darkness grew
deeper, until at last it assumed the intense character of the
preceding night. But still Tom sat up, and the boat went on. The
wind did not slacken, nor did the boat's progress cease. Hours
passed by in this way. As to the tides, Tom could not tell now
very well whether they were rising or falling, and, in fact, he was
quite indifferent, being satisfied fully with his progress. As
long as the wind distended his sail, and bore the boat onward, he
cared not whether the tide favored or opposed.
Hours passed, but such was Tom's excitement that he still bore up,
and thought nothing of rest or of sleep. His attention was needed,
too, and so he kept wide awake, and his ears were ever on the
stretch to hear the slightest sound. But at last the intense
excitement and the long fatigue began to overpower him. Still he
struggled against his weakness, and still he watched and listened.
Hours passed on, and the wind never ceased to fill the sail, and
the boat never ceased to go onward in a course of which Tom could
have no idea. It was a course totally different from the one which
be intended--a course which depended on the chance of the wind; and
one, too, which was varied by the sweep of the tide as it rose or
fell; but the course, such as it was, continued on, and Tom watched
and waited until, at last, from sheer exhaustion, he fell sound
asleep.
His dreams were much disturbed, but he slept on soundly, and when
he awaked it was broad day. He looked around in deep disappointment.
Fog was everywhere, as before, and nothing could be seen. Whether
he was near any shore or not he could not tell. Suddenly he noticed
that the wind was blowing from an opposite direction. How to
account for this was at first a mystery, for the fog still
prevailed, and the opposite wind could not bring fog. Was it
possible that the boat had turned during his sleep? He knew that it
was quite possible. Indeed, he believed that this was the case.
With this impression he determined to act on the theory that the
boat had turned, and not that the wind had changed. The latter idea
seemed impossible. The wind was the chill, damp fog wind--the
sou-wester. Convinced of this, Tom turned the boat, and felt
satisfied that he had resumed his true course.
After a time the wind went down, and the sail flapped idly against
the mast. Tom was in a fever of impatience, but could do nothing.
He felt himself to be once more at the mercy of the tides. The
wind had failed him, and nothing was left but to drift. All that
day he drifted, and night came on. Still it continued calm. Tom
was weary and worn out, but so intense was his excitement that he
could not think of sleep. At midnight the wind sprung up a little;
and now Tom determined to keep awake, so that the boat might not
again double on her track. He blamed himself for sleeping on the
previous night, and losing so much progress. Now he was determined
to keep awake.
His resolution was carried out. His intense eagerness to reach
some shore, no matter where, and his fear of again losing what he
had gained, kept sleep from his eyes. All that night he watched
his boat. The wind blew fitfully, sometimes carrying the boat on
rapidly, again dying down.
So the next morning came.
It was Thursday.
It was Monday night when he had drifted out, and all that time he
had been on the deep, lost in the fog.
And now, wearied, dejected, and utterly worn out, he looked around
in despair, and wondered where this would end. Fog was everywhere,
as before, and, as before, not a thing could be seen.
Hours passed on; the wind had sprang up fresh, and the boat went on
rapidly.
Suddenly Tom sprang upright, and uttered a loud cry.
There full before him he saw a giant cliff, towering far overhead,
towards which the boat was sailing. At its base the waves were
dashing. Over its brow trees were bending. In the air far above
he heard the hoarse cries of sea-gulls.
In his madness he let the boat drive straight on, and was close to
it before he thought of his danger. He could not avoid it now,
however, for he did not know how to turn the boat. On it went, and
in a few moments struck the beach at the base of the cliff.
The tide was high; the breeze was moderate, and there was but
little sun. The boat was not injured by running ashore there. Tom
jumped out, and, taking the rope in his hands, walked along the
rough and stony beach for about a hundred yards, pulling the boat
after him. There the cliff was succeeded by a steep slope, beyond
which was a gentle, grass-grown declivity. Towards this he bent
his now feeble steps, still tugging at the boat, and drawing it
after him.
At length he reached the grassy slope, and found here a rough
beach. He fastened the boat securely to the trunk of a tree that
grew near.
Then he lifted out the box of biscuit, and over this he threw the
sail.
He stood for a few moments on the bank, and looked all around for
signs of some human habitation; but no signs appeared. Tom was too
exhausted to go in search of one. He had not slept for more than
thirty hours. The country that he saw was cleared. Hills were at
a little distance, but the fog which hung all around concealed
everything from view. One look was enough.
Overwhelmed with gratitude, he fell upon his knees, and offered up
a fervent prayer of thankfulness for his astonishing escape.
Then fatigue overpowered him, and, rolling himself up in the sail,
he went to sleep.
VIII.
Off in Search.--Eager Outlook.--Nothing but Fog.--Speaking a
Schooner.--Pleasant Anecdotes.--Cheer up.--The Heart of Corbet.
After the arrival of Bruce and Bart, Captain Corbet did not delay
his departure much longer. The vessel was already afloat, and
though the tide was still rising, yet the wind was sufficiently
favorable to enable her to go on her way. The sails were soon set,
and, with the new boat in tow, the Antelope weighed anchor, and
took her departure. For about two hours but little progress was
made against the strong opposing current; yet they had the
satisfaction of reaching the mouth of the river, and by ten
o'clock, when the tide turned and began to fall, they were fairly
in the bay. The wind here was ahead, but the strong tide was now
in their favor, and they hoped for some hours to make respectable
progress.
During this time they had all kept an anxious lookout, but without
any result. No floating craft of any kind appeared upon the
surface of the water. Coming down the river, the sky was
unclouded, and all the surrounding scene was fully visible; but on
reaching the bay, they saw before them, a few miles down, a lofty
wall of light-gray cloud. Captain Corbet waved his hand towards
this.
"We're in for it," said he, "or we precious soon will be."
"What's that?" asked Phil.
"Our old friend--a fog bank. You'd ought to know it by this time,
sure."
There it lay, a few miles off, and every minute brought them
nearer. The appearance of the fog threw an additional gloom over
the minds of all, for they saw the hopeless character of their
search. Of what avail would it be to traverse the seas if they
were all covered by such thick mists? Still nothing else was to be
done, and they tried to hope for the best.
"Any how," said Captain Corbet, "thar's one comfort. That thar fog
may go as quick as it come. It ony needs a change of wind. Why,
I've knowed it all vanish in half an hour, an the fog as thick as
it is now."
"But sometimes it lasts long--don't it?"
"I should think it did. I've knowed it hang on for weeks."
At this gloomy statement the boys said not a word.
Soon after the schooner approached the fog bank, and in a little
while it had plunged into the midst of its misty folds. The chill
of the damp clouds, as they enveloped them, struck additional chill
to their hearts. It was into the midst of this that poor Tom had
drifted, they thought, and over these seas, amidst this impenetrable
atmosphere, he might even now be drifting. In the midst of the deep
dejection consequent upon such thoughts, it was difficult for them
to find any solid ground for hope.
The wind was moderate, yet adverse, and the schooner had to beat
against it. As she went on each tack, they came in sight of the
shores; but as time passed, the bay widened, and Captain Corbet
kept away from the land as much as possible. All the time the boys
never ceased to maintain their forlorn lookout, and watched over
the sides, and peered anxiously through the mist, in the hope that
the gloomy waters might suddenly disclose to their longing eyes the
form of the drifting boat and their lost companion.
"I tell you what it is, boys," said Captain Corbet, after a long
and thoughtful silence; "the best plan of acting in a biz of this
kind is to pluck up sperrit an go on. Why, look at me. You mind
the time when that boat, that thar i-dentical, individdle boat,
drifted away onst afore, with youns in it. You remember all about
that,--course. Well, look at me. Did I mourn? Did I fret? Was I
cast down? Nary down; not me. I cheered up. I cheered up Mr.
Long. I kep everybody in good sperrits. An what was the result?
Result was, you all turned up in prime order and condition, a
enjyin of yourselves like all possessed, along with old O'Rafferty.
"Again, my friends," he continued, as the boys made no remark,
"consider this life air short an full of vycissitoods. Ups an
downs air the lot of pore fallen hoomanity. But if at the fust
blast of misforten we give up an throw up the game, what's the good
of us? The question now, an the chief pint, is this--Who air we,
an whar air we goin, an what air we purposin to do? Fust, we air
hooman beins; secondly, we air a traversin the vast an briny main;
and thirdly, we hope to find a certain friend of ourn, who was
borne away from us by the swellin tide. Thar's a aim for us--a
high an holy aim; an now I ask you, as feller-critters, how had we
ought to go about it? Had we ought to peek, an pine, an fret, an
whine? Had we ought to snivel, and give it up at the fust? Or had
we ought, rayther, to be up an doin,--pluck up our sperrits like
men, and go about our important work with energy? Which of these
two, my friends? I pause for a reply."
This was quite a speech for Captain Corbet, and the effort seemed
quite an exhaustive one. He paused some time for a reply; but as
no reply was forthcoming, he continued his remarks.
"Now, see here," said he; "this here whole business reminds me of a
story I once read in a noospaper, about a man up in this here
identical river, the Petticoat Jack, who, like a fool, pulled up
his boat on the bank, and wont off to sleep in her. Wal, as a
matter of course, he floated off,--for the tide happened to be
risin,--an when he woke up out of his cool an refreshin slumbers,
he found himself afar on the briny deep, a boundin like 'a thing of
life,' o'er the deep heavin sea. Besides, it was precious foggy,--
jest as it is now,--an the man couldn't see any more'n we can.
Wal, the story went on to say, how that thar man, in that thar
boat, went a driftin in that thar fashion, in that thar fog; an he
drifted, an drifted, an derifted, for days an days, up an down, on
one side an t'other side, an round every way,--an, mind you, he
hadn't a bit to eat, or to drink either, for that matter,--'t any
rate, the paper didn't mention no such thing; an so, you know, he
drifted, an d-e-e-e-rifted,--until at last he druv ashore. An now,
whar d'ye think he druv?"
The boys couldn't think.
"Guess, now."
The boys couldn't guess.
"D'ye guv it up?"
They did.
"Wal, the paper said, he druv ashore at Grand Manan; but I've my
doubts about it."
The captain paused, looked all around through the fog, and stood
for a moment as though listening to some sound.
"I kine o' thought," said he, "that I detected the dash of water on
the shore. I rayther think it's time to bring her round."
The vessel was brought round on another tack, and the captain
resumed his conversation.
"What I was jest sayin," he continued, "reminds me of a story I
onst heard, or read, I forget which (all the same, though), about
two boys which went adrift on a raft. It took place up in Scott's
Bay, I think, at a ship-yard in that thar locality.
"These two unfortunate children, it seems, had made a raft in a
playful mude, an embarkin on it they had been amoosin theirselves
with paddlin about by pushin it with poles. At length they came to
a pint where poles were useless; the tide got holt of the raft, an
the ferrail structoor was speedily swept onward by the foorus
current. Very well. Time rolled on, an that thar raft rolled on
too,--far over the deep bellew sea,--beaten by the howlin storm, an
acted upon by the remorseless tides. I leave you to pictoor to
yourselves the sorrow of them thar two infant unfortunits, thus
severed from their hum an parients, an borne afar, an scarce enough
close on to keep 'em from the inclemency of the weather. So they
drifted, an drifted, an de-e-rifted, until at last they druv
ashore; an now, whar do you think it was that they druv?"
The boys couldn't say.
"Guess now."
The boys declined.
"Try."
They couldn't.
"Name some place."
They couldn't think of any.
"D'ye guv it up?" asked the captain, excitedly.
They did.
"Well, then," said he, in a triumphant tone, "they druv ashore on
Brier Island; an ef that thar ain't pooty tall driftin, then I'm a
Injine."
To this the boys had no reply to make.
"From all this," continued the captain, "you must perceive that
this here driftin is very much more commoner than you hev ben
inclined to bleeve it to be. You also must see that thar's every
reason for hope. So up with your gizzards! Pluck up your
sperrits! Rise and look fortin an the footoor squar in the face.
Squar off at fortin, an hav it out with her on the spot. I don't
want to hev you go mopin an whinin about this way. Hello!"
Captain Corbet suddenly interrupted his remarks by an exclamation.
The exclamation was caused by the sudden appearance of a sail
immediately to windward. She was coming up the bay before the
wind, and came swiftly through the fog towards them. In passing on
her way, she came astern of the Antelope.
"Schooner, ahoy!" cried Captain Corbet; and some conversation took
place, in which they learned that the stranger was the schooner
Wave, from St. John, and that she had not seen any signs whatever
of any drifting boat.
This news was received sadly by the boys, and Captain Corbet had to
exert his utmost to rouse them from their depression, but without
much effect.
"I don't know how it is," said he, plaintively, "but somehow your
blues air contiguous, an I feel as ef I was descendin into a
depression as deep as yourn. I don't remember when I felt so
depressed, cept last May--time I had to go off in the Antelope with
taters, arter I thought I'd done with seafarin for the rest of my
life. But that thar vessel war wonderously resussutated, an the
speouse of my buzzum druv me away to traverse the sea. An I had to
tar myself away from the clingin gerasp of my weepin infant,--the
tender bud an bulossum of an old man's life--tar myself away, an
feel myself a outcast. Over me hovered contennooly the image of
the pinin infant, an my heart quivered with responsive sympathy.
An I yearned--an I pined--an I groaned--an I felt that life would
be intoll'ble till I got back to the babby. An so it was that I
passed away, an had scace the heart to acknowledge your youthful
cheers. Wal, time rolled on, an what's the result? Here I air.
Do I pine now? Do I peek? Not a pine! Not a peek! As tender a
heart as ever bet still beats in this aged frame; but I am no
longer a purray to sich tender reminiscinsuz of the babby as onst
used to consume my vitals."
Thus it was that the venerable captain talked with the boys, and it
was thus that he sought, by every possible means, to cheer them up.
In this way the day passed on, and after five or six hours they
began to look for a turn of tide. During this time the schooner
had been beating; and as the fog was as thick as ever, it was
impossible for the boys to tell where they were. Indeed, it did
not seem as though they had been making any progress.
"We'll have to anchor soon," said the captain, closing his eyes and
turning his face meditatively to the quarter whence the wind came.
"Anchor?"
"Yes."
"What for?"
"Wal, you see it'll soon be dead low tide, an we can't go on any
further when it turns. We'll have wind an tide both agin us."
"How far have we come now?"
"Wal, we've come a pooty considerable of a lick now--mind I tell
you. 'Tain't, of course, as good as ef the wind had ben favorable,
but arter all, that thar tide was a pooty considerable of a tide,
now."
"How long will you anchor?"
"Why, till the next tarn of tide,--course."
"When will that be?"
"Wal, somewhar about eleven o'clock."
"Eleven o'clock?"
"Yes."
"Why, that's almost midnight."
"Course it is."
"Wouldn't it be better to cruise off in the bay? It seems to me
anything is better than keeping still."
"No, young sir; it seems to me that jest now anythin is better than
tryin to cruise in the bay, with a flood tide a comin up. Why,
whar d'ye think we'd be? It would ony take an hour or two to put
us on Cape Chignecto, or Cape d'Or, onto a place that we wouldn't
git away from in a hurry,--mind I tell you."
To this, of course, the boys had nothing to say. So, after a half
hour's further sail, the anchor was dropped, and the Antelope
stopped her wanderings for a time.
Tedious as the day had been, it was now worse. The fog was as
thick as ever, the scene was monotonous, and there was nothing to
do. Even Solomon's repasts had, in a great measure, lost their
attractions. He had spread a dinner for them, which at other
times, and under happier circumstances, would have been greeted
with uproarious enthusiasm; but at the present time it was viewed
with comparative indifference. It was the fog that threw this
gloom over them. Had the sky been clear, and the sun shining, they
would have viewed the situation with comparative equanimity; but
the fog threw terror all its own around Tom's position; and by
shutting them in on every side, it forced them to think of him who
was imprisoned in the same way--their lost companion, who now was
drifting in the dark. Besides, as long as they were in motion,
they had the consciousness that they were doing something, and that
of itself was a comfort; but now, even that consolation was taken
away from them, and in their forced inaction they fell back again
into the same despondency which they had felt at Petitcodiac.
"It's all this fog, I do believe," said Captain Corbet. "If it
want for this you'd all cheer up, an be as merry as crickets."
"Is there any prospect of its going away?"
"Wal, not jest yet. You can't reckon on it. When it chooses to go
away, it does so. It may hang on for weeks, an p'aps months.
Thar's no tellin. I don't mind it, bein as I've passed my hull
life in the middle of fog banks; but I dare say it's a leetle tryin
to youns."
The repast that Solomon spread for them on that evening was scarce
tasted, and to all his coaxings and remonstrances the boys made no
reply. After the tea was over, they went on deck, and stared
silently into the surrounding gloom. The sight gave them no
relief, and gave no hope. In that dense fog twilight came on soon,
and with the twilight came the shadows of the night more rapidly.
At last it grew quite dark, and finally there arose all around them
the very blackness of darkness.
"The best thing to do," said Captain Corbet, "is to go to sleep.
In all kinds of darkness, whether intunnel or extunnel, I've allus
found the best plan to be to sleep it off. An I've knowed great
men who war of my opinion. Sleep, then, young sirs, while yet you
may, while yer young blood is warm, an life is fresh an fair, an
don't put it off to old age, like me, for you mayn't be able to do
it. Look at me! How much d'ye think I've slep sence I left Mud
Creek? Precious little. I don't know how it is, but bein alone
with you, an havin the respons'bility of you all, I kine o' don't
feel altogether able to sleep as I used to do; an sence our late
loss--I--wal, I feel as though I'd never sleep agin. I'm talkin an
talkin, boys, but it's a solemn time with me. On me, boys, rests
the fate of that lad, an I'll scour these here seas till he turns
up, ef I hev to do it till I die. Anxious? Yes, I am. I'm that
anxious that the diskivery of the lost boy is now the one idee of
my life, for which I forget all else; but allow me to say, at the
same time, that I fully, furmly, an conshuentiously bleve an affum,
that my conviction is, that that thar lad is bound to turn up all
right in the end--right side up--with care--sound in every respect,
in good order an condition, jest as when fust shipped on board the
good schooner Antelope, Corbet master, for Petticoat Jack, as per
bill ladin."
The captain's tones were mournful. He heaved a deep sigh as he
concluded, and relapsed into a profound and melancholy silence.
The boys waited on deck for some time longer, and finally followed
his advice, and sought refuge below. They were young and strong,
and the fatigue which they felt brought on drowsiness, which, in
spite of their anxiety, soon deepened into sleep. All slept, and
at length Captain Corbet only was awake. It was true enough, as he
had said, the fate of the lost boy rested upon him, and he felt it.
His exhortations to the boys about keeping up their courage, and
his stories about lost men who had drifted to a final rescue, were
all spoken more with reference to himself than to them. He sought
to keep up his own courage by these words. Yet, in spite of his
efforts, a profound depression came over him, and well nigh subdued
him. No one knew better than he the many perils which beset the
drifting boat in these dangerous waters--the perils of storm, the
perils of fog, the perils of thick darkness, the perils of furious
tides, the perils of sunken rocks, of shoals, and of iron-bound
coasts. The boys had gone to sleep, but there was no sleep for
him. He wandered restlessly about, and heavy sighs escaped him.
Thus the time passed with him until near midnight. Then he roused
the mate, and they raised the anchor and hoisted the sails. It was
now the turn of tide, and the waters were falling again, and the
current once more ran down the bay. To this current he trusted the
vessel again, beating, as before, against the head wind, which was
still blowing; and thus the Antelope worked her way onward through
all that dark and dismal night, until at last the faint streaks of
light in the east proclaimed the dawn of another day.
Through all that night the boys slept soundly. The wind blew, the
waves dashed, but they did not awake. The anchor was hoisted, and
the sails were set, but the noise failed to rouse them. Weariness
of body and anxiety of mind both conspired to make their sleep
profound. Yet in that profound sleep the anxiety of their minds
made itself manifest; and in their dreams their thoughts turned to
their lost companion. They saw him drifting over the stormy
waters, enveloped in midnight darkness, chilled through with the
damp night air, pierced to the bone by the cold night wind;
drifting on amid a thousand dangers, now swept on by furious tides
towards rocky shores, and again drawn back by refluent currents
over vast sunken sea-ledges, white with foam. Thus through all the
night they slept, and as they slept the Antelope dashed on through
the waters, whose foaming waves, as they tumbled against her sides
and over her bows, sent forth sounds that mingled with their
dreams, and became intermingled with poor Tom's mournful cries.
IX.
Awake once more.--Where are we?--The giant cliff.--Out to Sea.--
Anchoring and Drifting.--The Harbor.--The Search.--No Answer.--
Where's Solomon?
Scarce had the streaks of light greeted Captain Corbet's eyes, and
given him the grateful prospect of another day, when the boys
awaked and hurried up on deck. Their first act was to take a
hurried look all around. The same gloomy and dismal prospect
appeared--black water and thick, impenetrable fog.
"Where are we now, Captain?" asked Bruce.
"Wal, a con-siderable distance down the bay."
"What are you going to do?"
"Wal--I've about made up my mind whar to go."
"Where?"
"I'm thinkin of puttin into Quaco."
"Quaco?"
"Yes."
"How far is it from here?"
"Not very fur, 'cordin to my calc'lations. My idee is, that the
boat may have drifted down along here and got ashore. Ef so, he
may have made for Quaco, an its jest possible that we may hear
about him."
"Is this the most likely place for a boat to go ashore?"
"Wal, all things considered, a boat is more likely to go ashore on
the New Brunswick side, driftin from Petticoat Jack; but at the
same time 'tain't at all certain. Thar's ony a ghost of a chance,
mind. I don't feel over certain about it."
"Will we get to Quaco this tide?"
"Scacely."
"Do you intend to anchor again?"
"Wal, I rayther think I'll hev to do it. But we'd ought to get to
Quaco by noon, I calc'late. I'm a thinkin--Hello! Good
gracious!"
The captain's sudden exclamation interrupted his words, and made
all turn to look at the object that had called it forth. One
glance showed an object which might well have elicited even a
stronger expression of amazement and alarm.
Immediately in front of them arose a vast cliff,--black, rocky,
frowning,--that ascended straight up from the deep water, its
summit lost in the thick fog, its base white with the foaming waves
that thundered there. A hoarse roar came up from those breaking
waves, which blended fearfully with the whistle of the wind through
the rigging, and seemed like the warning sound of some dark, drear
fate. The cliff was close by, and the schooner had been steering
straight towards it. So near was it that it seemed as though one
could have easily tossed a biscuit ashore.
But though surprised, Captain Corbet was not in the least confused,
and did not lose his presence of mind for a moment. Putting the
helm hard up, he issued the necessary commands in a cool, quiet
manner; the vessel went round, and in a few moments the danger was
passed. Yet so close were they, that in wearing round it seemed as
though one could almost have jumped from the stern upon the rocky
shelves which appeared in the face of the lofty cliff.
Captain Corbet drew a long breath.
"That's about the nighest scratch I remember ever havin had," was
his remark, as the Antelope went away from the land. "Cur'ous,
too; I don't see how it happened. I lost my reckonin a little.
I'm a mile further down than I calc'lated on bein."
"Do you know that place?" asked Bart.
"Course I know it."
"It's lucky for us we didn't go there at night."
"Yes, it is rayther lucky; but then there wan't any danger o' that,
cos, you see, I kep the vessel off by night, an the danger couldn't
hev riz. I thought we were a mile further up the bay; we've been a
doin better than I thought for."
"Shall we be able to get into Quaco any sooner?"
"Wal, not much."
"I thought from what you said that we were a mile nearer."
"So we air, but that don't make any very great difference."
"Why, we ought to get in all the sooner, I should think."
"No; not much."
"Why not? I don't understand that."
"Wal, you see it's low tide now."
"The tides again!"
"Yes; it's allus the tides that you must consider here. Wal, it's
low tide now, an the tide's already on the turn, an risin. We've
got to anchor."
"Anchor!"
"Yes."
"What, again?"
"Yes, agin. Even so. Ef we didn't anchor we'd only be drifted up
again, ever so far, an lose all that we've ben a gainin. We're not
more'n a mile above Quaco Harbor, but we can't fetch it with wind
an tide agin us; so we've got to put out some distance an anchor.
It's my firm belief that we'll be in Quaco by noon. The next
fallin tide will carry us thar as slick as a whistle, an then we
can pursue our investigations."
The schooner now held on her course for about a mile away from the
shore, and then came to anchor. The boys had for a moment lost
sight of this unpleasant necessity, and had forgotten that they had
been using up the hours of the ebb tide while asleep. There was no
help for it, however, and they found, to their disgust, another day
of fog, and of inaction.
Time passed, and breakfast came. Solomon now had the satisfaction
of seeing them eat more, and gave manifest signs of that
satisfaction by the twinkle of his eye and the lustre of his ebony
brow. After this the time passed on slowly and heavily; but at
length eleven o'clock came, and passed, and in a short time they
were once more under way.
"We're going to Quaco now--arn't we?" asked Phil.
"Yes; right straight on into Quaco Harbor, fair an squar."
"I don't see how it's possible for you to know so perfectly where
you are."
"Young sir, there ain't a nook, nor a corner, nor a hole, nor a
stun, in all the outlinin an configoortion of this here bay but
what's mapped out an laid down all c'rect in this here brain. I'd
undertake to navigate these waters from year's end to year's end,
ef I was never to see the sun at all, an even ef I was to be
perpetooly surrounded by all the fogs that ever riz. Yea, verily,
and moreover, not only this here bay, but the hull coast all along
to Bosting. Why, I'm at home here on the rollin biller. I'm the
man for Mount Desert, an Quoddy Head, an Grand Manan, an all other
places that air ticklish to the ginrality of seafarin men. Why,
young sir, you see before you, in the humble an unassumin person of
the aged Corbet, a livin, muvin, and sea-goin edition of Blunt's
Coast Pilot, revised and improved to a precious sight better
condition than it's ever possible for them fellers in Bosting to
get out. By Blunt's Coast Pilot, young sir, I allude to a
celebrated book, as big as a pork bar'l, that every skipper has in
his locker, to guide him on his wanderin way--ony me. I don't have
no call to use sech, being myself a edition of useful information
techin all coastin matters."
The Antelope now proceeded quickly on her way. Several miles were
traversed.
"Now, boys, look sharp," said the captain; "you'll soon see the
settlement."
They looked sharp.
For a few moments they went onward through the water, and at length
there was visible just before them what seemed like a dark cloud
extending all along. A few minutes further progress made the dark
cloud still darker, and, advancing further, the dark cloud finally
disclosed itself as a line of coast. It was close by them, and,
even while they were recognizing it as land, they saw before them
the outline of a wharf.
"Good agin!" cried the captain. "I didn't come to the wharf I
wanted, but this here'll do as well as any other, an I don't know
but what it'll do better. Here we air, boys. Stand by thar, mate,
to let fall the jib."
On they went, and in a few minutes more the Antelope wore round,
and her side just grazed the wharf. The mate jumped ashore, lines
were secured, and the Antelope lay in safety.
"An now, boys, we may all go ashore, an see if we can hear anything
about the boat."
With these words Captain Corbet stepped upon the wharf, followed by
all the boys, and they all went up together, till they found
themselves on a road. There they saw a shop, and into this they
entered. No time was to be lost; the captain at once told his
story, and asked his question.
The answer was soon made.
Nothing whatever was known there about any boat. Two or three
schooners had arrived within two days, and the shopkeeper had seen
the skippers, but they had not mentioned any boat. No boat had
drifted ashore anywhere near, nor had any strange lad arrived at
the settlement.
This intelligence depressed them all.
"Wal, wal," said the captain, "I didn't have much hopes; it's jest
as I feared; but, at the same time, I'll ask further. An first and
foremost I'll go an see them schooners."
He then went off with the boys in search of the schooners just
mentioned. These were found without difficulty. One had come from
up the bay, another from St. John, and a third from Eastport. None
of them had encountered anything like a drilling boat. The one
from up the bay afforded them the greatest puzzle. She must have
come down the very night of Tom's accident. If he did drift down
the bay in his boat, he must have been not very far from the
schooner. In clear weather he could not have escaped notice; but
the skipper had seen nothing, and heard nothing. He had to beat
down against the wind, and anchor when the tide was rising; but,
though he thus traversed so great an extent of water, nothing
whatever attracted his attention.
"This sets me thinkin," said the captain, "that, perhaps, he mayn't
have drifted down at all. He may have run ashore up thar. Thar's
a chance of it, an we must all try to think of that, and cheer up,
as long as we can."
Leaving the schooners, the captain now went through the settlement,
and made a few inquiries, with no further result. Nothing had been
heard by any one about any drifting boat, and they were at last
compelled to see that in Quaco there was no further hope of gaining
any information whatever about Tom.
After this, the captain informed the boys that he was going back to
the schooner to sleep.
"I haven't slep a wink," said he, "sence we left Grand Pre, and
that's more'n human natur can ginrally stand; so now I'm bound to
have my sleep out, an prepare for the next trip. You boys had
better emply yourselves in inspectin this here village."
"When shall we leave Quaco?"
"Wal, I'll think that over. I haven't yet made up my mind as to
what's best to be done next. One thing seems certain. There ain't
no use goin out in this fog, an I've half a mind to wait here till
to-morrow."
"To-morrow!"
"Yes,--an then go down to St. John."
"But what'll poor Tom be doing?"
"It's my firm belief that he's all right," said Captain Corbet,
confidently. "At any rate, you'd better walk about now, an I'll
try an git some sleep."
As there was nothing better to be done, the boys did as he
proposed, and wandered about the village. It was about two miles
long, with houses scattered at intervals along the single street of
which it was composed, with here, and there a ship-yard. At one
end was a long, projecting ledge, with a light-house; at the other
there was a romantic valley, through which a stream ran into the
bay. On the other side of this stream were cliffs of sandstone
rocks, in which were deep, cavernous hollows, worn by the waves;
beyond this, again, was a long line of a precipitous shore, in
whose sides were curious shelves, along which it was possible to
walk for a great distance, with the sea thundering on the rocks
beneath. At any other time they would have taken an intense
enjoyment in a place like this, where there were so many varied
scenes; but now their sense of enjoyment was blunted, for they
carried in their minds a perpetual anxiety. None the less, however,
did they wander about, penetrating up the valley, exploring the
caverns, and traversing the cliffs.
They did not return to the schooner till dusk. It would not be
high tide till midnight, and so they prolonged their excursion
purposely, so as to use up the time. On reaching the schooner they
were welcomed by Captain Corbet.
"I declar, boys," said he, "I'm getting to be a leetle the biggest
old fool that ever lived. It's all this accident. It's onmanned
me. I had a nap for two or three hours, but waked at six, an ever
sence I've been a worretin an a frettin about youns. Sence that
thar accident, I can't bar to have you out of my sight, for I fear
all the time that you ar gettin into mischief. An now I've been
skeart for two mortal hours, a fancyin you all tumblin down from
the cliffs, or a strugglin in the waters."
"O, we can take care of ourselves, captain," said Bart
"No, you can't--not you. I wouldn't trust one of you. I'm getting
to be a feeble creetur too,--so don't go away agin."
"Well, I don't think we'll have a chance in Quaco. Arn't we going
to leave to-night?"
"Wal, that thar is jest the pint that I've been moosin on. You see
it's thick; the fog's as bad as ever. What's the use of going out
to-night? Now, ef we wait till to-morrow, it may be clear, an then
we can decide what to do."
At this proposal, the boys were silent for a time. The experience
which they had formed of the bay and its fogs showed them how
useless would be any search by night, and the prospect of a clear
day, and, possibly, a more favorable wind on the morrow, was very
attractive. The question was debated by all, and considered in all
its bearings, and the discussion went on until late, when it was
finally decided that it would be, on the whole, the wisest course
to wait until the following day. Not the least influential of the
many considerations that occurred was their regard for Captain
Corbet. They saw that he was utterly worn out for want of sleep,
and perceived how much he needed one night's rest. This finally
decided them.
Early on the following morning they were all up, and eager to see
if there was any change in the weather. The first glance around
elicited a cry of admiration from all of them. Above, all was
clear and bright. The sun was shining with dazzling lustre; the
sky was of a deep blue, and without a cloud on its whole expanse;
while the wide extent of the bay spread out before them, blue like
the sky above, which it mirrored, and throwing up its waves to
catch the sunlight. A fresh north wind was blowing, and all the
air and all the sea was full of light and joy.
The scene around was in every respect magnificent. The tide was
low, and the broad beach, which now was uncovered by the waters,
spread afar to the right and left in a long crescent that extended
for miles. On its lower extremity it was terminated by a ledge of
black rocks, with the light-house before spoken of, while its upper
end was bounded by cavernous cliffs of red sandstone, which were
crowned with tufted trees. Behind them were the white houses of
the village, straggling irregularly on the borders of the long
road, with here and there the unfinished fabric of some huge ship;
while in the background were wooded hills and green sloping fields.
Out on the bay a grander scene appeared. Far down arose a white
wall, which marked the place where the fog clouds were sullenly
retreating; immediately opposite, and forty miles away over the
water, arose the long line of the Nova Scotia coast, which bounded
the horizon; while far up arose Cape Chignecto, and beside it
towered up the dark form of a lonely island, which they knew, in
spite of the evident distortion of its shape, to be no other than
Ile Haute.
The wondrous effects which can be produced by the atmosphere were
never more visible to their eyes than now. The coast of Nova
Scotia rose high in the air, dark in color, apparently only half
its actual distance away, while the summit of that coast seemed as
level as a table. It seemed like some vast structure which had
been raised out of the water during the night by some magic power.
Ile Haute arose to an extraordinary height, its summit perfectly
level, its sides perfectly perpendicular, and its color a dark
purple hue. Nor was Cape Chignecto less changed. The rugged cliff
arose with magnified proportions to a majestic height, and took
upon itself the same sombre color, which pervaded the whole of the
opposite coast.
Another discussion was now begun as to their best plan of action.
After talking it all over, it was finally decided to go to St.
John. There they would have a better opportunity of hearing about
Tom; and there, too, if they did hear, they could send messages to
him, or receive them from him. So it was decided to leave at about
eleven o'clock, without waiting for high tide; for, as the wind was
fair, they could go on without difficulty. After coming to this
conclusion, and learning that the tide would not be high enough to
float the schooner until eleven, they all took breakfast, and
stimulated by the exhilarating atmosphere and the bright sunshine,
they dispersed down the village towards the light-house.
By ten o'clock they were back again. The tide was not yet up, and
they waited patiently.
"By the way, captain," asked Bart, "what's become of Solomon?"
"Solomon? O, he took a basket an went off on a kine o' foragin
tower."
"Foraging?"
"Yes. He said he'd go along the shore, and hunt for lobsters."
"The shore? What shore?"
"Why, away up thar," said the captain, pointing towards the
headland at the upper end of the village.
"How long since?"
"Wal, jest arter breakfast. It must hev ben afore seven."
"It's strange that he hasn't got back."
"Yes; he'd ought to be back by this time."
"He can't get any lobsters now; the tide is too high."
"That's a fact."
They waited half an hour. The rising tide already touched the
Antelope's keel.
"Solomon ought to be back," cried Bart, starting up.
"That's so," said Captain Corbet.
"I'm afraid something's happened. He's been gone too long. Two
hours were enough."
The boys all looked at one another with anxious faces.
"If he went up that shore," said Bart, "he may have got caught by
the tide. It's a very dangerous place for anybody--let alone an
old man like him."
"Wal, he did go up thar; he said partic'lar that he wanted to find
somethin of a relish, an would hunt up thar. He said, too, he'd be
back by nine."
"I'm certain something's happened," cried Bart, more anxiously
than before. "If he's gone up there, he's been caught by the
tide."
Captain Corbet stared, and looked uneasy.
"Wal, I must say, that thar's not onlikely. It's a bad place, a
dreadful bad place,--an him an old man,--a dreadful bad place.
He'd be down here by this time, ef he was alive."
"I won't wait any longer," cried Bart. "I must go and see. Come
along, boys. Don't let's leave poor old Solomon in danger. Depend
upon it, he's caught up there somewhere."
"Wal, I think you're right," said Captain Corbet, "an I'll go too.
But ef we do go, we'd better go with some preparations."
"Preparations? What kind of preparations?"
"O, ony a rope or two," said Captain Corbet; and taking a coil of
rope over his arm, he stepped ashore, and all the boys hurried
after him.
"I feel kine o' safer with a kile o' rope,--bein a seafarin man,"
he remarked. "Give a seafarin man a rope, an he'll go anywhar an
do anythin. He's like a spider onto a web."
X.
Tom ashore.--Storm at Night.--Up in the Morning.--The Cliffs and
the Beach.--A startling Discovery.--A desert Island.--A desperate
Effort.--Afloat again.
Tom slept soundly for a long time in the spot where he had flung
himself. The sense of security came to the assistance of his
wearied limbs, and lulled him into profounder slumbers. There was
nothing here that might rudely awaken him--no sudden boat shocks,
no tossings and heavings of waves, no hoarse, menacing thunders of
wrathful surges from rocky shores; nor were there distressing
dreams to harass him, or any anxieties carried from his waking
hours into the land of slumbers to annoy and to arouse. From
Monday night until this time on Thursday, he had known but little
sleep, and much fatigue and sorrow. Now the fatigue and the sorrow
were all forgotten, and the sleep was all his own. Not a thought
had he given to the land which he had reached so strangely. It was
enough for him that he felt the solid ground beneath his feet.
For hours he slept there, lying there like a log, wrapped in the
old sail, moving not a limb, but given up altogether to his
refreshing slumber. At length he waked, and, uncovering his head,
looked around. At first he thought that he was in the boat, then
he grew bewildered, and it was only after a persistent effort of
memory that he could recollect his position.
He looked all around, but nothing was visible. There was nothing
around him but darkness, intense and utter. It was like the
impenetrable veil that had enshrouded him during the night of his
memorable voyage. He could not see where his boat was. A vague
idea which he had of examining its fastening was dismissed. He
felt hungry, and found the biscuit box lying under one corner of
the sail. A few of these were sufficient to gratify his hunger.
Nothing more could be done, and he saw plainly that it would be
necessary for him to wait there patiently until morning. Once
more, therefore, he rolled himself up in the sail, and tried to go
to sleep. But at first his efforts were vain. The first fatigue
had passed away, and now that he had been refreshed by sleep, his
mind was too much occupied by thoughts of his past voyage to be
readily lulled to sleep again. He could not help wondering what
Captain Corbet and the boys were doing. That they were searching
for him everywhere he well knew, but which direction they had
chosen he could not tell. And what was the place whither he had
drifted? He felt confident that it was the mouth of the
Petitcodiac, and could not help wondering at the accuracy of his
course; yet, while wondering, he modestly refrained from taking the
credit of it to himself, and rather chose to attribute it to the
wind and tide. It was by committing himself so completely to their
guidance, he thought, that he had done so well.
In the midst of such thoughts as these, Tom became aware of the
howling of the wind and the dash of the waters. Putting forth his
head, he found that there was quite a storm arising; and this only
added to his contentment. No fear had he now, on this solid
ground, of rising wind or swelling wave. Even the fog had lost its
terrors. It was with feelings like these that he once more covered
up his head from the night blast; and not long after he was once
more asleep.
When he next awaked, it was day. Starting to his feet, he looked
around him, and shouted for joy. The sky was clear. The sun was
rising, and its rays, coming from over the distant hills, were
glittering over the surface of the water. The wind had changed.
The fog had dispersed.
No sooner had he seen this than he was filled with curiosity to
know where he was. This did not look much like the mouth of the
Petitcodiac. He stared around with a very strange sensation.
Immediately beside him, where he was standing, the easy slope went
back for a hundred yards or so, covered with short, wild grass,
with here and there a stunted tree. Turning round, he saw the land
rising by a steep acclivity towards the heights which bordered on
the sea in such tremendous cliffs. Over the heights, and along the
crest of those cliffs, were flying great flocks of sea-gulls, which
kept up one incessant chorus of harsh, discordant screams. In
front of him spread out a broad sheet of water, on the opposite
side of which arose a lofty line of coast. Into this there
penetrated a long strait, beyond which he could see broad waters
and distant shores--a bay within a bay, approached by this strait.
On each side of the strait were lofty, towering cliffs; and on one
side, in particular, the cliffs were perpendicular, and ran on in a
long and unbroken wall. The extremity of the cliff nearest him was
marked by a gigantic mass of broken rock, detached from the main
land, and standing alone in awful grandeur.
What place was this? Was this the mouth of the Petitcodiac? Was
that broad bay a river? Was he still dreaming, or what did it all
mean? And that gigantic fragment severed from a cliff, which thus
stood guard at the entrance of a long strait, what was that? Could
it be possible? Was there indeed any other broken cape, or could
it be possible that this was Cape Split?
He hurried up the slope, and on reaching the top, saw that it
descended on the other side towards the water. This water was a
broad sheet, which extended for seven or eight miles, and was
terminated by a lofty coast that extended down the bay as far as
the eye could reach. One comprehensive glance was sufficient. He
saw it all, and understood it all. It was not the mouth of the
Petitcodiac River. It was the entrance to the Basin of Minas that
lay before him. There lay the great landmarks, seen under new
aspects, it is true, yet now sufficiently distinguishable. There
was the Nova Scotia coast. In yonder hollow was Scott's Bay. That
giant rock was Cape Split. The long channel was the Strait of
Minas, and the cliffs opposite were Cape d'Or and Cape Chignecto.
And now the recognition of all these places brought to him a great
and sudden shock.
For what was this place on which he stood? Was it any part of the
main land?
It was not.
He looked around.
It was an island.
He saw its lofty cliffs, its wooded crest, its flocks of sea-gulls,
its sloping east end, where he stood, running down to a low point.
He had seen them all at a distance before; and now that he stood
here, he recognized all.
He was on Ile Haute!
The moment that he recognized this startling fact, he thought of
his boat. He hurried to the beach. The tide was very low. To his
immense relief he found the fastening of the boat secure, and he
turned away at once, without any further examination, to think over
his situation, and consider the best plan for reaching the main
land. Making a comfortable seat for himself on the sail, he sat
down, and drawing out the box, he took some biscuit. Then feeling
thirsty, he went off in search of fresh water. Before he had
walked many paces he found a brook.
The brook was a small one, which ran from the lofty west end of the
island to the low land of the east, and thence into the bay. The
water was good, and Tom satisfied his thirst by a long draught.
Judging by the position of the sun, it was now about seven o'clock
in the morning; and Tom seated himself once more, and began to try
to think how it was that he should have come in a direction so
entirely different from the one which he had believed himself to be
taking. He had fully expected to land at Petitcodiac, and he found
himself far away on the other side of the bay. Yet a little
reflection showed him how useless it was to try to recall his past
voyage, and how impossible it was for him to account for it,
ignorant as he was of the true direction of the wind and of the
tide. He contented himself with marking a rude outline of his
course on his memorandum book, making allowance for the time when
he turned on that course; and having summed it all up to his own
satisfaction in a crooked line which looked like a slip-knot, he
turned his attention to more important matters.
There was one matter of first-rate importance which now pressed
itself upon his thoughts, and that was, how to escape from his
present situation. As far as he could see, there was no inhabitant
on the island, no house, no cultivation, and no domestic animal.
If there had been anything of that kind, they would be visible, he
knew, from the point where he was standing. But all was deserted;
and beyond the open ground in his neighborhood arose the east end,
wooded all over its lofty summit. From Captain Corbet's words, and
from his own observation, he knew that it was a desert island, and
that if he wished to escape he would have to rely altogether upon
his own resources.
With this conclusion he once more turned his attention to his
surroundings.
Nearest to him was Cape d'Or, about four miles away, and Cape
Split, which was some distance farther. Then there was the Nova
Scotia shore, which appeared to be seven or eight miles distant.
On the beach and within sight was the boat which offered a sure and
easy mode of passing over to the main land. But no sooner did he
recognize this fact than a difficulty arose. How was he to make
the passage? The boat had come ashore at high tide, and was close
up to the grassy bank. The tide was far down, and between the boat
and the water was a broad beach, covered with cobblestones, and
interspersed with granite boulders. It was too heavy a weight for
him to move any distance, and to force it down to the water over
such a beach was plainly impossible. On the other hand, he might
wait until the boat floated at high tide, and then embark. But
this, again, would be attended with serious difficulties. The
tide, he saw, would turn as soon as he should get fairly afloat,
and then he would have to contend with the downward current. True,
he might use his sail, and in that case he might gain the Nova
Scotia shore; but his experience of the tides had been so terrible
a one, that he dreaded the tremendous drift which he would have to
encounter, and had no confidence in his power of navigating under
such circumstances. Besides, he knew well that although the wind
was now from the north, it was liable to change at any moment; so
that even if he should be able to guide his boat, he might yet be
suddenly enveloped by a fog when but half way over, and exposed
once more to all those perils from which he had just escaped. The
more he thought of all these dangers, the more deterred he felt
from making any such attempt. Rather would he wait, and hope for
escape in some other way.
But, as yet, he did not feel himself forced to anything so
desperate as that. There was another alternative. At high tide
the boat would be afloat, and then, as the tide fell, he could keep
her afloat until it was at its lowest. He could then embark, and
be carried by the returning water straight on to the Straits of
Minas, and up into the basin. He now made a calculation, and
concluded that it would be high tide about midday, and low tide
about six in the evening. If he were to embark at that time, he
would have two hours of daylight in which to run up with the tide.
He saw now that his whole plan was perfectly feasible, and it only
remained to make preparations for the voyage. As the whole
afternoon would be taken up in floating the boat down to low-water
mark, the morning would have to be employed in making whatever
arrangements might be necessary.
Certain things were needed which required all that time. His
hastily extemporized mast and sail had done wonderfully well, but
he needed something to steer with. If he could only procure
something that would serve the purpose of a rudder, he would feel
well prepared for his voyage.
On the search for this he now started. He walked all about the
open ground, looking around in all directions, to see if he could
find anything, but without any success. Then he ascended the
declivity towards the woods, but nothing appeared which was at all
adapted to meet his wants. He saw a young tree, which he thought
might do, and tried to cut it down with his pocket-knife. After
about an hour's hard work he succeeded in bringing it down, and
another hour was spent in trimming the branches. The result of all
this labor at length lay at his feet in the shape of a rough pole,
with jagged splinters sticking out all over it, which promised to
be of about as much utility as a spruce bush. In utter disgust he
turned away, leaving the pole on the ground, and making up his mind
to sail, as he did before, without any rudder. In this mood he
descended the declivity, and walked disconsolately towards the
shore which was on the side of the island directly opposite to
where the boat lay. He had not yet been near enough to see the
beach; but now, as he came nearer, a cry of delight escaped him
involuntarily; for there, all along the beach, and close up to the
bank, lay an immense quantity of drift-wood, which had been brought
here by the tide from all the upper waters of the bay. It was a
most heterogeneous mixture that lay before him--chips from timber
ponds, logs from ship-yards, boards from saw-mills, deals, battens,
fence posts, telegraph poles, deal ends, edgings, laths, palings,
railway sleepers, treenails, shingles, clapboards, and all the
various forms which wood assumes in a country which makes use of it
as the chief material of its manufactures. Along the countless
streams that flow into the bay, and along its far-winding shores,
and along the borders of all its subsidiary bays, and inlets, and
basins, the manufacture of wood is carried on--in saw-mills, in
ship-yards, and in timber ponds; and the currents that move to and
fro are always loaded with the fragments that are snatched away
from these places, most of which are borne afar out to sea, but
many of which are thrown all along the shores for hundreds of
miles. Ile Haute, being directly in the way of some of the
swiftest currents, and close by the entrance to a basin which is
surrounded by mills and ship-yards, naturally received upon its
shores an immense quantity of these scattered and floating
fragments. Such was the sight that now met the eyes of Tom, and
presented him with a countless number of fragments of wood adapted
to his wants, at the very time when he had worked fruitlessly for
two hours at fashioning one for himself.
Looking over the heaps of drift-wood, he found many pieces which
suited him; and out of these he chose one which was shaped a little
like an oar. Securing this prize, he walked over to where the sail
was, and deposited it there.
Then he ate some biscuit, and, after taking a draught from the cool
brook, he rested, and waited, full of hope, for the rising of the
tide.
It was now rapidly approaching the boat. Tom watched it for some
time, and felt new happiness as he viewed the roll of every little
surf. There was not much wind, and nothing but a gentle ripple on
the water. All this was in his favor; for, if he wished for
anything now, it was a moderate breeze and a light sea. From time
to time he turned his attention to the Straits of Minas, and
arranged various plans in his mind. At one time he resolved to try
and reach Pereau; again he thought that he would be content if he
could only get to Parrsboro'; and yet again, he came to the wise
conclusion that if he got to any settlement at all he would be
content. At another time he half decided to take another course,
and try to reach Scott's Bay, where he felt sure of a warm welcome
and a plenteous repast. Aiming thus at so many different points,
it mattered but little to him in what particular direction the tide
might sweep him, so long as it carried him up the bay.
The tide now came nearer, and Tom went down to the beach for a few
moments. He paced the distance between the boat and the water. He
noticed a few things lying in the boat. In the bow was a coil of
rope which Captain Corbet had probably obtained when he was ashore
at Petitcodiac. There was also a tin pan, used for baling.
As the tide drew nearer, Tom began to feel more and more impatient.
Again and again he paced the intervening space between the boat and
the water, and chafed and fretted because it did not lessen more
rapidly. If the boat were once fairly afloat, he felt that the
time would pass much more rapidly; for then he would be working at
some definite task, and not standing idly waiting.
But everything has an end; and so, at length, the end came here.
The water rose higher and higher, until, at length, it touched the
keel. Tom gave a shout of joy.
He now untied the rope, and tried to shorten his suspense by
pushing the boat towards the water; but his strength was
insufficient. He could not move it. He would have to wait longer.
Thus far the things which he had taken out had been lying on the
grass. It was now time to put them on board. So he carried down
the sail, folded it up, and stowed it away neatly at the bottom of
the boat. On this he stood the box of biscuit, taking care to put
the cover over it, and to spread over that again one fold of the
sail.
This took up some time, and he had the gratification of seeing that
the water had come up a few feet farther. He now tried once more
to force the boat down, using his piece of board as a lever; but
the board bent, and almost broke, without moving the boat. He
stood for a moment waiting, and suddenly thought of the pole which
he had left up in the woods. He determined to get this, and
perhaps, with its help, he would be able to accomplish his wishes.
So off he started at a run, and in a few minutes reached the place.
Hurrying back again, he inserted one end of the pole under the bow,
and exerted all his force to press the boat downward into the
water. At first it did not move; but shortly after, when the water
had risen still higher, he made a new effort. This time he
succeeded; the boat moved slightly.
Again.
The boat moved farther.
Once more.
Still farther.
And now he made a final trial. Thrusting the pole again
underneath, he exerted all his force for the last time, and pushed
the boat down for about a yard.
It was at last afloat.
The tide had not yet fully attained its height, but was close to
it. The wind was blowing from the north, as before, and quite
moderately. The sea sparkled and glittered in the rays of the sun.
The little wavelets tossed their heads on high, and danced far
away ever the sea. The air was bright, and stimulating, and
exhilarating. All the scene filled Tom's heart with gladness; and
the approach of his deliverance deepened and intensified this
feeling.
XI.
Afloat again.--The rushing Water.--Down to the Bottom.--Desperate
Circumstances.--Can they be remedied?--New Hopes and Plans.
The boat was at last afloat before Tom's eyes.
At first he had thought of holding it by the painter, and patiently
standing on the beach, but the sight of it now changed his
purposes. He thought that it would be a far more sensible plan to
get on board, and keep the boat near the beach in that way. His
bit of stick, which he had found among the drift-wood, could be
used as an oar, and was good enough to enable him to move the boat
as much as would be necessary. As he would have to wait for six
hours at least, it was a matter of great importance that he should
be as little fatigued as possible, especially as he had to look
forward to a voyage, after the tide had fallen, attended with the
possibility of increased labor and exertion. All these thoughts
came rapidly to his mind, but passed in much less time than it
takes to tell it, so that Tom had scarcely seen the boat afloat
than he rushed through the water, and clambered into it. Then,
taking his stick, he stood up and looked around.
The scene around has already been described. Tom kept his stick in
the water, so as to have it ready for use. He purposed keeping the
boat at a convenient distance from the shore by pushing and
paddling. By keeping it within a distance of from three to six
yards, he thought he would, for the present at least, be able to
keep afloat, and yet avoid the sweep of the tides. He did not
expect to remain in this particular spot all the time, but expected
to find some place which would be out of the way of the tide, where
he could float comfortably without being forced to keep in too
close to the land.
But suddenly Tom's thoughts and speculations were rudely interrupted.
It appeared to him that there was a very unusual feeling about the
boat. She did not seem as high out of the water as she ought to
have been, and her bows seemed to be lower than they had been.
There was also a slight vibration in her, which he had never
noticed before, and which struck him now as very peculiar. In the
midst of this there came to his ears a low, faint, and scarcely
perceptible sound, made up of peculiar bubbling and gurgling
noises, which sounded from the boat.
One brief examination showed him that the boat was certainly very
much deeper in the water than she had been.
Five seconds later her bows had sunk farther.
Two seconds more, and Tom's feet were surrounded by water up to his
ankles.
The boat was filling!
Scarce had he made this discovery than the water rose swiftly up,
the boat sank quickly down, the sea rolled over her sides, and the
boat went to the bottom.
Very fortunate was it for Tom, at that moment, that he had not
pushed out farther from the shore. When the boat went down he was
not more than three or four yards off, and he did not sink lower
than up to his neck. But the shock was a sudden one, and for a
moment almost paralyzed him. The next instant, however, he
recovered from it; and looking round, he saw the box of biscuit
floating within his reach. Making a wild dash at this, he secured
it, and waded ashore with it in safety. He then turned mournfully
to look after the boat, and found that it was visible, floating on
the surface. As he left it, it had floated up, his weight being
the only thing that had sent it below. The tide was still coming
in, so that it did not float away. Tom flung off his coat and
waistcoat, and hurrying into the water, soon caught and dragged it
as near as he could to the beach. Then he secured it once more,
and waited. Standing there, he looked gloomily at the vessel,
wherein such precious hopes had been freighted only to be lost.
What had happened? Why could not the boat float? What was the
matter with her? These were the wondering questions which occurred
to him without his being able to give any answer.
One thing he saw plainly, and that was, that he had lost this tide.
The next high tide would be after midnight, and the next would be
between one and two on the following day. If he could find out
what was the matter with the boat, and fix it, he would have to
wait till the next day, unless he chose to watch for his chance
after midnight, and make the journey then.
He was not a boy who could be long inactive; so now, after a brief
period, in which he gave up to the natural despondency of his soul,
he stirred himself up once more, and sought comfort in occupation.
The box of biscuit did not seem much injured, it had not floated
long enough for the sea-water to penetrate it. Assuring himself of
this, he next turned to the boat and took out its contents. These
were the old sail, the coil of rope, and the baling dipper.
By this time the tide had reached its height, and after the usual
time of delay, began to fall once more. The boat was secured to
the shore, and after a time the water began to leave her. Tom sat
at a little distance, wondering what could be the matter with her,
and deferring his examination until the boat should be left
aground. It was a mystery to him how this sudden change had
occurred, and why the boat, which had floated so well during his
long drift, should now, all of a sudden, begin to leak with such
astonishing rapidity. Something must have happened--something
serious, too; but what it was, or how it had happened, he could
not, for the life of him, conjecture.
As Tom sat there, the tide gradually left the boat; and as the tide
left, the water ran out, keeping at just the same level inside as
the water outside. This showed, even to his inexperienced eyes,
that the leak must be a very large one, since it admitted of such a
ready flow of water in and out. The water descended lower and
lower as he sat, until, at last, the boat was left by the
retreating waves. The water had all run out.
Tom now advanced, and proceeded to examine her. When he was
arranging her cargo before, the coil of rope had been in the bows.
This had prevented him from detecting anything wrong in the boat.
But now, since everything had been taken out, one glance only was
quite sufficient to make known to him instantly the whole
difficulty. There, in the bows, underneath the very place where
the coil of rope had lain, was a huge aperture. The planks had
been beaten in, and one side of the bow was destroyed beyond hope
of remedy.
The sight of such an irremediable calamity as this renewed for a
time the despondency which he had felt at the first sinking of the
boat. Full of depression, he turned away, and tried to account for
it all. It was on the previous day that he had landed--about
twenty-four hours ago. How had he passed the time since then, and
what had happened? This he tried to remember.
In the first place, up to the moment of landing the boat was
perfectly sound, and far from all injury. It had not been hurt
during the drift. It had struck at one place, but the long voyage
that had followed showed that no damage had resulted. Finally, it
had not been harmed by landing on Quaco Ledge. Since that time he
had drifted in safety far across the bay, without meeting with any
accident. All this proved clearly that the damage must have been
done to the boat since his landing on the island.
He found it very difficult to recall anything that had happened
since then. On his first arrival he was worn out and exhausted.
He remembered vaguely how he came in sight of the giant cliff, how
he dragged the boat along, how he secured it to a tree, and then
how he flung himself down on the grass and fell asleep. After that
all was obscure to his memory; but he could recall his waking at
midnight and listening to the roar of the wind and the dash of the
surf. Evidently there must have been a heavier sea on the beach at
that time than when he landed, and this was sufficient to account
for the accident to the boat. She had been beating on the rough
rocks at high tide, exposed to the full sweep of the surf, and her
bows had been stove in.
The melancholy spectacle of the ruined boat made Tom see that his
stay on the island might be prolonged even beyond the following
day. No sooner had this thought occurred to him than he went over
to the articles which he had taken out of the boat, and passed them
all in review before him, as though he were anxious to know the
full extent of his resources. He spread out the wet sail in the
sun. He spread out his coat and waistcoat. In the pocket of the
latter he found a card of matches, which were a little damp. These
he seized eagerly and laid on the top of a stone, exposed to the
rays of the sun, so as to dry them. The clothes which he kept on
were wet through, of course, but he allowed them to dry on him.
He had been working now pretty industriously all the morning, first
at searching after a piece of wood, then in cutting down the pole,
then in searching among the drift-wood, and finally at the boat.
He felt, at length, hungry; and as he could not yet decide upon
what was to be done next, he determined to satisfy his desires, and
kill the time by taking his dinner. The repast was a frugal one,
consisting as before, of biscuit, which were washed down by cold
water; but Tom did not complain. The presence of food of any sort
was a cause for thankfulness to one in his position, and it was
with a feeling of this sort, in spite of his general depression of
spirits, that he ate his meal.
After this he felt much more refreshed, and began to consider what
he had better do next. Of course, the centre of interest to him
was the boat, and he could not give up that hope of escape without
a struggle. As long as there was a hope of making his way from the
island by means of that, so long might he keep up his heart; but if
the damage that had been done should prove irreparable, how would
he be able to endure his situation? Whatever it was, it would be
best to know the worst once for all. Perhaps he might stop the
leak. He had material around which seemed to be the right sort of
thing to stop a leak with. He had the piece of sail, which could
be cut up into small pieces, and used to stop the leak. If he had
possessed a hatchet and some nails, he would have made an effort to
repair the fracture in the planks of the boat; but as he had
nothing of that sort, he tried to devise some method by which the
water might be kept out. As he thought, there gradually grew up in
his mind the rude outline of a plan which promised something, and
seemed to him to be certainly worth trying. At any rate, he
thought, it will serve to give me an occupation; and any
occupation, even if it proves to be of no practical value, is
better than sitting here doing nothing at all.
Having something to do once more quickened Tom's energies anew, and
starting to his feet, he prepared to put his plan into execution.
First of all, in order to carry out that plan, it was necessary for
him to get a number of blocks and boards of different sizes.
These, he knew, could easily be found among the driftwood on the
beach. Over there he hurried, and after a moderate search he
succeeded, at length, in finding bits of wood that seemed suited to
the purpose which he had in view. With these he came back to the
boat; but as there was a large number of them, he had to make
several journeys before the whole collection was brought over.
Then he took his pole, and, putting a block under it, used it as a
lever to raise up the boat. By dexterous management he succeeded
in doing this, and at the same time he ran a board underneath the
bow of the boat as it was slightly raised. This manoeuvre he
repeated several times, each time raising his lever higher, by
means of a higher fulcrum, and thus constantly raising the bow of
the boat; while after each elevation the bow was secured in its new
position by running an additional board underneath it, over the
other preceding boards. By carefully and perseveringly pursuing
this course, he at length succeeded in raising the bow of the boat
about a foot in the air. This gave him an opportunity to examine
it thoroughly outside as well as inside, and to see the whole
extent of the damage that had been done.
It has already been said that the damage was serious. Tom's
examination now convinced him that it was in every respect as
serious as he had supposed, if not still more so. Even if he did
possess a hatchet and nails, or a whole box full of tools, he
doubted whether it would be in his power to do anything whatever in
the way of repairing it. No less than three of the lower planks of
the bows, down to the very keel, were beaten in and broken so badly
that they seemed actually crushed and mangled. It must have been a
fearful beating, and pounding, and grinding on the rocks which had
caused this. The planks, though thus broken, still held together;
but it seemed to Tom that with a blow of his fist he could easily
beat it all in; and as he looked at it he could not help wondering
how it had happened that the work which the rocks had thus so
nearly effected had not been completely finished. However, the
planks did hold together yet; and now the question was, Could any
thing be done?
In answer to this question, Tom thought of the old sail and the
coil of rope. Already he had conceived the rude outline of a plan
whereby the entrance of the water might be checked. The plan was
worth trying, and he determined to set about it at once, and use up
the hours before him as long as he could, without any further delay.
If by any possibility he could stop that leak, he determined to
start off at the next high tide, that very night, and run the risk.
It was a daring, even a foolhardy thought; but Tom was desperate,
and the only idea which he had was, to escape as soon as possible.
He now made some measurements, after which he went to the old sail,
and cut a piece from the end of it. This he divided into smaller
pieces, each about a yard square. Each of these pieces he folded
up in three folds, so as to make them about a foot wide and
eighteen inches long. Others he folded into six folds, making them
about half the size of the larger pieces. All this took up much
time, for he measured and planned very carefully, and his
calculations and measurements had to be done slowly and cautiously.
Returning to the boat with these bits of folded canvas, he put one
of the larger pieces on the inside, against the bow, right over the
broken place. Another large piece was placed carefully over this,
and then the smaller pieces were laid against these. In this way
he adjusted all the pieces of canvas in such a way as to cover up
the whole place where the leak was.
Then he went over to the drift-wood, and spent a long time
searching after some bits of wood. He at length found a half dozen
pieces of board, about a foot long, and from six to eight inches in
width. He also found some bits of scantling, and palings, which
were only a foot or so in length. All these he brought back, and
laid them down on the beach near the boat.
He now proceeded to place these bits of wood in the bows, in such a
way as to keep the canvas in a firm position. His idea was, that
the canvas, by being pressed against the opening, might keep out
the water, and the wood, by being properly arranged, might keep the
canvas secure in its place. The arrangement of the wood required
the greatest care. First of all, he took the smallest bits, and
stood these up against the canvas, so that they might correspond as
nearly as possible with the curve of the bows. A few more pieces
were placed in the hollow part of this curve, and outside these the
larger pieces were placed. Between the outside pieces and the
inner ones he thrust some of the smallest pieces which he could
find. After thus arranging all his boards, he found that there lay
between the outside board and the first seat of the boat a space of
about one foot. Selecting a piece of wood of about that length, he
put one end against the board, and the other against the seat, and
pressed it into a position where it served to keep the board tight
in its place. Then he took other pieces of about the same length,
and arranged them in the same way, so that, by being fixed between
the board and the seat, they might keep the whole mass of boards
and canvas pressed tight against the opening in the bows. After
placing as many blocks in position as he conveniently could, his
next work was to secure them all. In order to effect this, another
journey to the drift-wood was necessary, and another search. This
time he selected carefully a number of sticks, not more than half
an inch in thickness, some of them being much thinner. He found
pieces of paling, and laths, and shingles which suited his ideas.
Returning with these to the boat, he proceeded to thrust them, one
by one, into the interstices of the boards, using a stone to drive
them into their places.
At last the work was finished as far as he could accomplish it, and
there remained nothing more to be done. As far as he could see, by
shaking, and pulling, and pushing at the collection of sticks and
canvas, it was very firm and secure. Every stick seemed to be
tight, and the pressure which they maintained against the aperture
was so strong that the wood-work now was forced out a little
distance beyond the outline of the boat. He examined most
carefully all about the bows on the outside, but saw no place which
did not seem to be fully protected. It seemed to him now as though
that piled-up canvas ought to resist the entrance of the water, or,
if not, at least that it ought not to allow it to enter so rapidly
but that he could easily keep the boat baled out.
He was not altogether confident, yet he was hopeful, and as
determined as ever to make a trial.
XII.
Waiting for high Water.--A Trial.--A new Discovery.--Total
Failure.--Down again.--Overboard.--A Struggle for Life.
Tom's work was thus, at length, accomplished, and it remained now
to get the boat in readiness and wait. Slowly and carefully he
raised the bow by means of the lever, and one by one he withdrew
the boards which held it up. At last the boat lay on the beach,
ready to receive the uplifting arms of the returning tide whenever
it should make its appearance again. Tom saw with satisfaction
that the boat was about three yards down below high-water mark, on
the spot to which he had dragged it after the failure of his last
experiment. This, of course, would be so much in his favor, for it
would thus be able to float before the water should reach its
height.
He had worked hard all the afternoon, and it was already dark. The
tide, which had been falling, had some time ago reached its lowest
point, and was now returning. Between him and the lowest point was
a great distance, for the tides here rise to a perpendicular height
of over forty feet; but Tom knew that the time required to traverse
the long space that here intervened between high and low-water mark
was precisely the same as if it had only to rise a few feet.
He was very hungry, but some things had yet to be done. He had to
put on board the boat the articles that he had taken ashore. His
matches were now quite dry, and he put them in his pocket with a
deep sense of their value to him in his present position. His
clothes also were dry, and these he put on. The sail, the coil of
rope, and the box of biscuit were put on board the boat. Tom had
still to make his frugal repast; but this was soon accomplished,
and he felt again a sense of exceeding thankfulness at the
possession of the box of biscuit. At length his evening meal was
over, and by the time that he had finished it, it had grown quite
dark. He now went to the boat, and tied up the sail around the
mast. There was nothing to which he could fasten the boat; but it
was not necessary, as he was on the watch. The water continued
smooth, the wind was from the north, as before, and there was no
sign of fog. Overhead the sky was free from clouds, and the stars
twinkled pleasantly to his upturned eyes, as if to encourage him.
There was no moon, however, and though it was not very dark, yet it
was sufficiently so to veil the nearest shores in gloom, and
finally to withdraw them altogether from his view. Still it was
not a matter of necessity that he should see the opposite shores,
for he knew that his chief, and indeed his only reliance must be
upon the tide; and this would bear him in its upward course on the
morrow. The night was only needed to float the boat down as far as
low-water mark. The process of floating her would serve to test
the security of the fastenings, and show whether he could venture
to make the attempt.
For hours Tom waited, sometimes seated in the boat, at other times
walking along the beach down to the water. He found it difficult
to keep himself awake, and therefore did not venture to sit down
long. Wearied with his long work through the day, the necessity of
constant exertion wearied him still more, until at length he could
scarce draw his legs after him. But all things have an end, and so
it was with Tom's dreary watch; for at length the waters came up,
and touched the boat, and surrounded it, until at last, to his
great joy, Tom found himself afloat. He seized his stick, and
pushed the boat into deeper water, a few yards off, with the
intention of keeping her at about that distance from the shore.
The one thought that was now in his mind referred exclusively to
his work in the boat. Was it firm? Would it hold? Did it leak?
The boat was floating, certainly. How long would if continue to do
so? For a few minutes he waited anxiously, as he floated there in
deep water, with his eyes fixed on the work in the bow, and his
ears listening intently to detect any sign of that warning,
gurgling sound, which had struck terror to his heart on his last
embarkation. But no sign came of any sound of that sort, and he
heard nothing but the gentle dash of the water against the sides of
the boat. Thus about five minutes passed. At the end of that
time, he raised the sail, which he had laid along the bottom of the
boat, and examined underneath it. The first touch of his fingers
at the bottom lessened very largely the hope that was in him, and
at once chased away the feeling of exultation that was rising. For
there, in the bottom of the boat, he felt as much as an inch of
water. After the first shock, he tried to believe that it was only
the water that was in the boat before; and so, taking comfort in
this thought, he waited for further developments, but at the same
time took the dipper, so as to be ready to bale out the water, and
have a struggle for it in case the worst should happen.
Another minute assured him that this was not the water which had
been in the boat before. A new supply was entering, and in the
space of that short time of waiting it had risen to the height of
another inch. Tom felt a sudden pang of dismay, but his stout
heart did not quail, nor did his obstinate resolution falter.
Since it was the sea water that was coming in, he determined to
have a fight with it for the possession of the boat. So he set to
work bravely, and began to bale. He pulled up the sail, so as to
have plenty of elbow-room, and worked away, dipping out the water;
but, as he dipped, he perceived that it was gradually getting
deeper. He dipped faster, but without any visible improvement,
indeed, his efforts seemed to have but very little effect in
retarding the entrance of the water. It grew deeper and deeper.
One inch of water soon deepened to two inches, and thence to three.
Soon after four inches were felt.
And now the water came in more rapidly. It seemed to Tom as though
it had been delayed at first, for a little time, in finding an
entrance, but that now, after the entrance was found, it came
pouring in with ever-accelerated speed. Tom struggled on, hoping
against hope, and keeping up his efforts long after they were
proved to be useless. But the water came in faster and faster,
until at length Tom began to see that he must seek his safety in
another way. Flinging down his dipper, then, with a cry of
vexation, he started up, and, seizing his bit of board, he looked
around for the shore.
He had been caught by some side current, and had been carried along
in such a way that he was about a hundred yards from the island,
and seemed to be drifting up the bay. The dark, shadowy shores
were much farther away than he had suspected. While struggling to
bale out the boat, he had forgotten how necessary it was to keep
near to the shore. He now saw his mistake, and strove to paddle
the boat back again. With such a clumsy oar it is not likely that
he could have achieved his desire at all, had the flood tide been
stronger; but now it was about at its height, and would soon turn,
if it was not turning already. The current, therefore, was but a
weak one, and Tom found himself able to move slowly back; but his
progress was very slow, and working at such a disadvantage was
excessively fatiguing. At last he saw that if he trusted to
paddling he could never reach the shore. In a moment another idea
suggested itself; there was no time to lose, and he at once acted
on it. Darting forward, he loosed the sail. The wind was still
blowing from the north; at once the sail was filled, and, yielding
to this new power, the boat began to move more rapidly. Tom tied
the sheet astern, and, seizing his paddle, tried to scull the boat.
For some minutes he kept up this work, and the boat moved steadily
forward, nearer and still nearer, until the land was at length not
more than thirty or forty yards off.
But by this time the danger had come nearer, and the boat was
already half full of water. Tom began to see that it could not
float as far as the shore. What was he to do? He waited a little
longer. He looked around. The boat was drawing nearer, yet soon
it must go down. To ease it, it would be necessary to relieve it
of his own weight. He did not lose his presence of mind for a
moment, but determined at once to jump overboard. In his perfect
coolness he thought of one or two things which were of importance
to him, and performed them swiftly and promptly. First he took the
box of biscuit, and placed it on the heap of boards and canvas in
the bows, so that it might remain as long as possible out of reach
of the water. Then he took the card of matches out of his
waistcoat pocket, and put them in his hat, which he replaced on his
head. To secure thus from damage the two necessaries of food and
fire was but the work of a few seconds. To throw off his coat,
waistcoat, and trousers, and hang them over the top of the short
mast, was the work of a few seconds more. By the time this had
been done, the water was nearly up to the gunwales. In five
seconds more the boat would have gone down; but, so well had Tom's
work been done, and so promptly, that these five seconds were
saved. Having done what he wished, he let himself down into the
water; and, holding on by the stern of the boat, he allowed himself
to float after it, kicking out at the same time, so as to assist,
rather than retard, its progress.
By this time the land was not more than twenty yards away. The
boat did not sink so rapidly now, but kept afloat much better;
still the water rose to a level with the gunwales, and Tom was too
much rejoiced to find that it kept afloat at all to find fault with
this. The wind still blew, and the sail was still up; so that the
water-logged vessel went on at a very respectable rate, until at
length half the distance which Tom had noticed on going overboard
was traversed. The boat seemed to float now, though full of water,
and Tom saw that his precious biscuit, at any rate, would not be
very much harmed. Nearer and nearer now he came until at last,
letting himself down, his feet touched bottom. A cry of delight
escaped him; and now, bracing himself firmly against the solid land
below, he urged the boat on faster, until at length her deep-sunk
bows grated against the gravel of the beach.
He hurried up to the box of biscuit, and put this ashore in a safe
place; after which he secured the boat to a jagged rock on the
bank. He found now that he had come to a different part of the
beach altogether, for his boat was lying at the spot where the
little brook ran into the sea. Well was it for him, in that rash
and hazardous experiment, that he had floated off before the tide
was high. It had led to his drifting up the bay, instead of down,
and by a weak current, instead of a strong one. The wind had thus
brought him back. Had it been full tide, he would have drifted out
from the shore, and then have been carried down the bay by the
falling water to swift and sure destruction.
Tom now took off his wet shirt, and put on the dry clothes which he
had so prudently hung on the top of the mast. He perceived that he
had not a very pleasant lookout for the night, for the sail which
he had formerly used to envelop himself with was now completely
saturated. It was also too dark to go to the woods in search of
ferns or mosses on which to sleep. However, the night was a
pleasant one, and the grass around would not be so bad a resting-
place as he had been forced to use while drifting in the boat. He
had now become accustomed to hardship by bitter experience, and so
he looked forward to the night without care.
The day had been an eventful one, indeed, for him, and his last
adventure had been full of peril, from which he had been most
wonderfully rescued.
These thoughts were in his mind, and he did not fail to offer up
prayers of heartfelt gratitude to that good and merciful Being who
had thus far so wonderfully preserved him. With such feelings in
his heart, he sought out a sleeping-place, and after some search he
found a mossy knoll. Seating himself here, he reclined his back
against it, and in a few minutes the worn-out boy was buried in a
deep sleep.
He slept until late on the following day, and on waking looked
around to see if there were any sails in view. None were visible.
The tide was about half way up, and the wide waters spread before
him without any vessel in sight. He then began his preparations
for the day. He hung his shirt upon a bush, and spread out the wet
sail on the grass. An examination of the biscuit showed him that
they had scarcely been injured at all, the water having penetrated
only the lower part of the box. He removed the lower layer of
biscuit, and spread them out on a rock in the sun to dry. After
this he breakfasted, and wandered about for a time. He then took a
swim, and felt much refreshed. By the time that his swim was over,
he found that the hot sun had dried his shirt, so that he could
once more assume that very important article of clothing.
The sun climbed high towards the zenith, and the tide came up
higher, as Tom sat there alone on his desert island, looking out
upon the sea. The boat from which he had hoped so much had proved
false to those hopes, and all the labors of the previous day had
proved useless. His attempt to escape had nearly resulted in his
destruction. He had learned from that experiment that no efforts
of his could now effect his rescue. He had done the very best he
could, and it would not be possible for him, with his present
resources, to contrive anything better than that which had so
miserably failed. If he could only procure some tar, he might then
stop up the interstices; but as it was, nothing of his construction
would avail to keep back the treacherous entrance of the water. It
seemed now to him that his stay on the island was destined to be
prolonged to a much greater extent than he had first thought of,
and there did not seem any longer a hope of saving himself by his
own exertions.
Alone on a desert island!
It was a dreadful fact which now forced itself more and more upon
Tom's mind, until at length he could think of nothing else.
Hitherto he had fought off the idea whenever it presented itself,
and so long as he had been able to indulge in any hope of freeing
himself by his own exertions, he prevented himself from sinking
into the gloom of utter despair. But now he could no longer save
himself from that gloom, and the thought grew darker and drearier
before him--the one fact of his present situation.
Alone on a desert island!
A very interesting thing to read about, no doubt; and Tom, like all
boys, had revelled in the portrayals of such a situation which he
had encountered in his reading. No one had entered with more zest
than he into the pages of Robinson Crusoe, and no one had enjoyed
more than he the talks which boys love to have about their possible
doings under such circumstances. But now, to be here, and find
himself in such a place,--to be brought face to face with the hard,
stern, dismal fact,--was another thing altogether. What oppressed
him most was not the hardships of his position. These he could
have withstood if there had been nothing worse. The worst part of
his present life was its solitude. If Bart had been here with him,
or Bruce, or Arthur, or Phil, or Pat, how different it would have
been! Even old Solomon would have enabled him to pass the time
contentedly. But to be alone,--all alone,--without a soul to speak
to,--that was terrible.
Tom soon found that the very way to deepen his misery was to sit
still and brood over it. He was not inclined to give way to
trouble. It has already been seen that he was a boy of obstinate
courage, resolute will, and invincible determination. He was
capable of struggling to the last against any adversity; and even
if he had to lose, he knew how to lose without sinking into
complete despair. These moods of depression, or even of despair,
which now and then did come, were not permanent. In time he shook
them off, and looked about for some new way of carrying on the
struggle with evil fortune.
So now he shook off this fit of depression, and starting up he
determined not to sit idle any longer.
"I won't stand it," he muttered. "There's lots of things to be
seen, and to be done. And first of all I've got to explore this
island. Come, Tom, my boy; cheer up, old fellow. You've pretended
to admire Robinson Crusoe; act up to your profession. And first of
all, my boy, you've got to explore Juan Fernandez."
The sound of his own voice had the effect of encouraging and
inspiriting him, while the purpose which he thus assigned to
himself was sufficient to awaken his prostrated energies. There
was something in the plan which roused all his curiosity, and
turned his thoughts and feelings into a totally new direction. No
sooner, then, had this thought occurred to him, than he at once set
out to put it into execution.
First of all he took one parting look at the scene around him. The
sun had now passed its meridian, and it seemed to be one o'clock or
after. The tide was high. The boat, which had at first floated,
was now nearly full of water. Tom threw a melancholy glance at
this fresh proof of the utter futility of all his labor, and then
examined the fastenings, so that it might not drift away during his
absence. Then he searched among the drift-wood until he found a
stout stick to assist him in climbing, and to serve as a companion
in his walk, after which he started.
The sun was bright, but over the sky some clouds were gathering,
and the opposite shores seemed to have grown darker than they were
a few hours ago, having assumed a hue like olive green. The wind
had also died away, and the water was as smooth as glass.
XIII.
Where's Solomon?--An anxious Search.--The Beach.--The cavernous
Cliffs.--Up the Precipice.--Along the Shore.--Back for Boats.
The loss of Solomon had filled the boys with anxiety, and even
Captain Corbet shared in the common feeling. He had preferred to
set out, as he said, with a coil of rope; but the sight of this
seemed to make Solomon's fate appear darker, and looked as though
he might have fallen over a precipice, or into a deep pool of
water. They all knew that a serious accident was not at all
improbable. They had seen the lofty and rugged cliffs that lined
the bay shore, and knew that the rising waters, as they dashed over
them, might form the grave of a man far younger and more active
than the aged Solomon. He was weak and rheumatic; he was also
timid and easily confused. If the water had overtaken him
anywhere, he might easily fall a prey. In his efforts to escape,
he would soon become so terrified that his limbs would be
paralyzed. He might then stumble over the rocks, and break some of
his bones, or he might be intrapped in some recess of the cliffs,
from which escape might be impossible without external help.
Full of thoughts like these, the boys went on, with Captain Corbet,
up through the village, looking carefully around as they went on,
and making inquiries of every one whom they met. No one, however,
could give them any information. At last they reached the end of
the village. Here, on the left, there arose a high hill. The road
wound round this, and descended into a valley, through which a
stream ran to the bay. In this valley there was a ship-yard, where
the half-finished fabric of a large ship stood before them, and
from which the rattle of a hundred axes rose into the air. The
valley itself was a beautiful place, running up among steep hills,
till it was lost to view among a mass of evergreen trees and rich
foliage. Below the shipyard was a cove of no very great depth, but
of extreme beauty. Beyond this was a broad beach, which, at the
farthest end, was bounded by the projecting headland before alluded
to. The headland was a precipitous cliff of red sandstone, crowned
at the summit with a fringe of forest trees, white at its base were
two or three hollow caverns, worn into the solid rock by the action
of the surf. One of these was about thirty feet in height at its
mouth, and ran back for sixty or seventy feet, narrowing all the
way, like a funnel, from its entrance to its farthest extremity.
The tide was now nearly at its height, and progress down the beach
and along the cliff was impossible. The caves were cut off also,
and the water penetrated them for some distance. At low tide one
could easily walk down to the extreme point of the headland, and
rounding this, he would find it possible to go along in front of
the cliffs for an immense distance, either by walking along the
rough beach at their foot, or, if the water should rise again, by
going along rocky shelves, which projected for miles from the
surface of the cliff.
Reaching the head of the beach, Captain Corbet paused, and looked
around.
"Before goin any further," said he, "we'd better ask the folks at
this ship-yard. It ain't possible to tell whether he's gone by the
beach or not. He may have gone up the valley."
"O," said Bart, dolefully, "he must have gone by the beach."
"I rayther think I'll ask, at any rate," said the captain.
So saying, he walked up towards a house that was not far off, and
accosted some men who were standing there. On hearing his
question, they were silent for a few moments; and at last one of
them recollected seeing an aged colored man passing by early in the
morning. He had a basket on his arm, and in every way corresponded
to the description of Solomon. He was on his way up the shore.
"Did he go down to the pint," asked Captain Corbet, "or up to the
top of the cliff?"
The man couldn't say for certain; but as far as he could recollect,
it seemed to him that he went down to the pint.
"About what time?"
"Between eight and nine o'clock--in fact, about eight--not much
later."
"Did he speak to any one here?"
"No; he walked past without stoppin. An do you say he ain't got
back?"
"Not yet."
"Wal," said the man, "for an old feller, an a feller what don't
know the country hereabouts, he's gone on a dangerous journey; an
ef he's tried to get back, he's found it a pooty hard road to
travel."
"Isn't there any chance of his gettin back by the cliff?"
"Not with the water risin onto his path."
"Is there any way of gettin up to the top of the cliff?"
"Wal, fur a active young feller it wouldn't be hard, but for a pore
old critter like that thar, it couldn't be done--no how."
"Wal, boys," said Captain Corbet, sorrowfully, "I guess we'd better
get on, an not lose any more time."
They walked away in silence for some time, until at last they
reached the foot of the cliff. A path here ran up in a winding
direction so as to reach the top.
"It seems too bad," said Captain Corbet, "not to be able to get to
the beach. I wish I'd come in the boat. What a fool I was not to
think of it!"
"O, I dare say the top of the cliff will do," said Bruce.
"Wal, it'll have to do. At any rate I've got the kile of rope."
"We shall be able to see him from the top just as well, and perhaps
better."
"Wal, I hope so; but we'll be a leetle too far above him for my
fancy,--ony we can use the rope, I s'pose. Can any of you
youngsters climb?"
"O, yes," said Bart, "all of us."
"What kind of heads have you got--stiddy?"
"Yes, good enough," said Bruce. "I'll engage to go anywhere that I
can find a foothold; and here's Bart, that'll go certainly as far,
and perhaps farther. And here's Phil, that can do his share. As
for Pat, he can beat us all; he can travel like a fly, upside down,
or in any direction."
"Wal, I'm glad to hear that, boys, for it's likely you'll be wanted
to do some climbin afore we get back. I used to do somethin in
that way; but since I've growed old, an rheumatic, I've got kine o'
out o' the way of it, an don't scacely feel sech confidence in
myself as I used to onst. But come, we mustn't be waitin here all
day."
At this they started up the path, and soon reached the top of the
cliff.
Arriving here, they found themselves in a cultivated meadow,
passing through which they reached a pasture field. After a walk
of about a quarter of a mile, they came to the cliff that ran along
the shore of the bay, and on reaching this, the whole bay burst
upon their view.
It was still a beautiful day; the sun was shining brilliantly, and
his rays were reflected in a path of dazzling lustre from the face
of the sea. The wind was fresh, and the little waves tossed up
their heads across where the sunlight fell, flashing back the rays
of the sun in perpetually changing light, and presenting to the eye
the appearance of innumerable dazzling stars. Far away rose the
Nova Scotia shore as they had seen it in the morning, while up the
bay, in the distance, abrupt, dark, and precipitous, arose the
solitary Ile Haute.
Beneath them the waters of the bay foamed and splashed; and though
there was not much surf, yet the waters came rolling among the
rocks, seething and boiling, and extending as far as the eye could
reach, up and down, in a long line of foam.
Reaching the edge, they all looked down. At the bottom there were
visible the heads of black rocks, which arose above the waves at
times, but which, however, at intervals, were covered with the
rolling waters that tossed around them in foam and spray. Nearer
and higher up there were rocks which projected like shelves from
the face of the cliff, and seemed capable of affording a foothold
to any climber; but their projection served also to conceal from
view what lay immediately beneath.
Along the whole beach, however, up and down, there appeared no sign
of human life. Anxiously they looked, hoping to see some human
form, in some part of that long line of rock; but none was visible,
and they looked at one another in silence.
"Wal, he don't turn up yet; that's clar," said Captain Corbet.
"We can see a great deal from here, too," said Bart, in a
despondent tone.
"Ay, an that's jest what makes the wust of it. I thought that one
look from a commandin pint would reveal the wanderer to our eyes."
"Perhaps he is crouching in among the rocks down there."
"Wal, I rayther think he'd manage to git up a leetle further out of
the reach of the surf than all that."
"He may be farther on."
"True; an I dare say he is, too."
"There don't seem to be any place below these rocks, where he would
be likely to be."
"No; I think that jest here he could climb up, as fur as that thar
shelf, certain. He may be old an rheumatic, but he's able enough
to climb that fur."
"I don't think anything could have happened to him here, or we
should see some signs of him."
"Course we would--we'd see his remains--we'd see his basket, or his
hat, floatin and driftin about. But thar's not a basket or a hat
anywhar to be seen."
"The cliff is long here, and runs in so from that point, that if he
went up any distance, it would be easy for him to be caught by the
rising tide."
"Course it would. O, yes, course. That's the very thing that
struck me. It's very dangerous for an ole inexperienced man. But
come, we mustn't stand talkin, we must hurry on, or we may as well
go back agin, at onst."
Starting forward, they walked on for some time in silence. For
about a hundred yards they were able to keep close to the edge of
the cliff, so as to look over; but after that they encountered a
dense alder thicket. In order to traverse this, they had to go
farther inland, where there was some sort of an opening. There
they came to a wood where the underbrush was thick, and the walking
difficult. This they traversed, and at length worked their way
once more to the edge of the cliff. Looking down here, they found
the scene very much like what it had been farther back. The waves
were dashing beneath them among rocks whose black crests were at
times visible among the foam, while from the cliffs there were the
same projecting shelves which they had noticed before.
"See there!" cried Bart, pointing to a place behind them. "Do you
see how the cliff seems to go in there--just where the alder bushes
grow? That looks like a place where a man might be caught. I
wonder if he isn't there."
"Can't we go and see?"
"I don't think you can git thar."
"O, it isn't far," said Bart. "I'll run back and look down. The
rest of you had better go on; I'll join you soon."
"I'll go with you," said Bruce.
"Very well."
Bruce and Bart then set out, and forced their way through the dense
alder bushes, until at length they found themselves near the place.
Here there was a chasm in the line of cliff, reaching from the top
to the bottom. The sides were precipitous, and they could see
perfectly well all the way down. At the bottom the water was
rolling and tossing; and this, together with the precipitous
cliffs, showed them plainly that no one could have found shelter
here.
Sadly and silently they returned, and rejoined the others, who had
been walking along in advance.
"Wal?" said Captain Corbet, interrogatively.
Bart shook his head.
They then walked on for some time in silence. "Come," said Captain
Corbet; "we've been makin one mistake ever sence we started."
"What's that?"
"We've kep altogether too still. How do we know but we've passed
him somewhar along down thar. We can't see behind all them
corners."
"Let's shout now--the rest of the way."
"Yes; that's it; yell like all possessed."
The cries of the boys now burst forth in shrill screams and yells,
which were echoed among the woods and rocks around.
"Now," cried Captain Corbet, "all together!"
The boys shouted all together.
"That'll fetch him," said the captain, "ef anythin doos. It's a
pity we didn't think of this afore. What an ole fool I must ha ben
to forgit that!"
The boys now walked on shouting, and screaming, and yelling
incessantly, and waiting, from time to time, to listen for an
answer.
But no answer came.
At times Captain Corbet's voice sounded forth. His cry was a very
peculiar one. It was high pitched, shrill, and penetrating, and
seemed as though it ought to be heard for miles. But the united
voices of the boys, and the far-piercing yell of the captain, all
sounded equally in vain. No response came, and at last, after
standing still and listening for a longer time than usual, they all
looked despondingly at one another, as though each were waiting for
the other to suggest some new plan of action.
Captain Corbet stood and looked musingly out upon the sea, as
though the sight of the rolling waters assisted his meditations.
It was some time before he spoke.
"I tell you what it is, boys," said he at last. "We've ben makin
another mistake."
"How so?"
"We've gone to work wrong."
"Well, what can we do now?"
"Wal, fust an foremost, I muve we go back on our tracks."
"Go back?"
"Yas."
"Why?"
"Wal, you see, one thing,--Solomon can't hev come further than this
by no possibility, onless he started straight off to walk all the
way up the bay agin, back to Petticoat Jack by the shore route,--an
as that's too rough a route for an ole man, why, I calc'late it's
not to be thought of. Ef, on the contrairy, he only kem out to
hunt for fish, 'tain't likely he come as fur as this, an in my
pinion he didn't come nigh as fur. You see we're a good piece on,
and Solomon wouldn't hev come so fur if he'd cal'lated to get back
to the schewner. What d'ye say to that?"
"I've thought of that already," said Bruce, sadly. "We've
certainly gone as far as he could possibly have gone."
"Terrew," said Captain Corbet, solemnly.
"But what can we do now?" asked Bart.
"Fust of all, go back."
"What! give him up?"
"I didn't say that. I said to go back, an keep a good lookout
along the shore."
"But we've done that already."
"Yes, I know; but then we didn't begin to yell till quite lately,
whereas we'd ought to hev yelled from the time of fust startin.
Now, I think ef we went back yellin all the way, we'd have a chance
of turnin him up somewhar back thar whar we fust came in sight of
the cliff. Very likely, if he ain't already drownded, he's a
twisted himself up in some holler in the cliff back thar. He
couldn't hev got this fur, certain,--unless he'd ben a runnin
away."
All this seemed so certain to the boys that they had nothing to say
in opposition to it. In fact, as Bruce said, they had already gone
as far as Solomon could possibly have gone, and this thought had
occurred to them all. Captain Corbet's proposition, therefore,
seemed to them the only course to follow. So they all turned and
went back again.
"What I was a goin to say," remarked Captain Corbet, after walking
a few paces,--"what I was a goin to say was this. The mistake I
made was in not gettin a boat."
"A boat? Why we've traced the coast from the cliff well enough--
haven't we?"
"No, not well enough. We'd ought to have planned this here
expedition more kerfully. It wan't enough to go along the top of
the cliff this here way. You see, we've not been able to take in
the lower part of the cliff underneath. We'd ought to hev got a
boat. Some of us could hev gone along the cliff, jest as we hev
ben doin, and the others could have pulled along the shore an kep
up a sharp lookout that way. We've lost any quantity o' time that
way, but that's no reason why we should lose any more; so I muve
that some of us go back, right straight off, an get a boat at the
ship-yard, an come back. I'll go, unless some o' youns think
yourselfes smarter, which ain't onlikely."
"O, you can't run, captain," said Bart. "Bruce and I will go, and
we'll run all the way."
"Wal, that's the very best thing that you could do. You're both
young, an actyve. As for me, my days of youth an actyvity air
over, an I'm in the sere an yaller leaf, with spells o' rheumatics.
So you start off as quick as your legs can carry you, an ef you run
all the way, so much the better."
The boys started off at this, and going on the full run, they
hurried, as fast as possible, back over the path they had
traversed, and through the woods, and over the fields, and down the
cliff towards the ship-yard.
Phil and Pat, however, remained with Captain Corbet; and these
three walked back along the edge of the cliff; still looking down
carefully for signs of Solomon, and keeping up constantly their
loud, shrill cries.
Thus they walked back, till, at length, they reached the place
where the alders were growing. Here they were compelled to make a
detour as before, after which they returned to the cliff, and
walked along, shouting and yelling as when they came.
XIV.
Back again.--Calls and Cries.--Captain Corbet's Yell.--A
significant Sign.--The old Hat.--The return Cry.--The Boat rounds
the Point.
Captain Corbet, with Phil and Pat, walked along the top of the
cliff in this way, narrowly scrutinizing the rocks below, and
calling and shouting, until, at length, they reached the place at
which they had first come out upon the shore.
"Now, boys," said the captain, "from here to the pint down thar is
all new ground. We must go along here, an keep a good lookout. If
we hev any chance left of findin anythin, it's thar. I'm ony sorry
we didn't examine this here fust an foremost, before wanderin away
off up thar, whar 'tain't at all likely that Solomon ever dreamed
of goin. I hope the boys won't be long gettin off that thar boat."
"Perhaps they can't get one."
"O, yes, they can. I saw two or three down thar."
They now walked on a little farther.
At this place the cliff was as steep as it had been behind; but the
rocky shelves were more numerous, and down near the shore they
projected, one beyond another, so that they looked like natural
steps.
"If Solomon was caught by the tide anywhar hereabouts," said
Captain Corbet, "thar's no uthly reason why he shouldn't save
himself. He could walk up them rocks jest like goin up stairs, an
git out of the way of the heaviest surf an the highest tide that
these shores ever saw."
"It all depends," said Phil, "on whether he staid about here, or
went farther up."
"Course--an it's my opinion that he did stay about here. He was
never such an old fool as to go so far up as we did. Why, ef he'd
a done so over them rocks, he'd never have got the use of his legs
agin."
"Strange we don't see any signs of him."
"O, wal, thar's places yet we hevn't tried."
"One thing is certain--we haven't found any signs of him. If
anything had happened, we'd have seen his basket floating."
"Yes, or his old hat."
"I should think, if he were anywhere hereabouts, he'd hear the
noise; we are shouting loud enough, I'm sure. As for your voice,
why, he ought to hear it a mile away; and the point down there
doesn't seem to be a quarter that distance."
"O, it's further than that; besides, my voice can't penetrate so
easily down thar. It gits kine o' lost among the rocks. It can go
very easy in a straight line; but when it's got to turn corners an
go kine o' round the edges o' sharp rocks, it don't get on so well
by a long chalk. But I think I'll try an divarsify these here
proceedins by yellin a leetle lower down."
So saying, Captain Corbet knelt down, and putting his head over the
cliff, he uttered the loudest, and sharpest, and shrillest yell
that he could give. Then he listened in silence, and the boys also
listened in breathless expectation for some time. But there was no
response whatever.
Captain Corbet arose with a sigh.
"Wal, boys," said he, in a mournful tone, "we must git on to the
pint. We'd ought to know the wust pooty soon. But, at any rate,
I'm bound to hope for the best till hope air over."
The little party now resumed their progress, and walked on towards
the point, shouting at intervals, as before.
From this place on as far as the point, the ground was clear, and
there was nothing to bar their way. They could go along without
being compelled to make any further detour, and could keep near
enough to the edge to command a view of the rocks below. They
walked on, and shouted without ceasing, and thus traversed a
portion of the way.
Suddenly Captain Corbet's eye caught sight of something in the
water. It was round in shape, and was floating within a few feet
of the shore, on the top of a wave. As Captain Corbet looked, the
wave rolled from underneath it, and dashed itself upon the rocks,
while the floating object seemed to be thrown farther out. The
tide had turned already, and was now on the ebb, so that floating
articles, such as this, were carried away from the shore, rather
than towards it.
Upon this Captain Corbet fastened his gaze, and stood in silence
looking at it. At length he put his hand on Phil's shoulder, and
directed the attention of the boys to the floating object.
"Do you see that?" said he.
"What?"
"That thing."
"What--that round thing?"
"Yes, that round thing. Look sharp at it now. What doos it look
like to your young eyes?"
Phil and Pat looked at it very carefully, and in silence. Then
Phil looked up into Captain Corbet's face without saying a word.
"Wal?"
"What is it, do you think?" asked Phil, in a low voice.
"What do YOU think?"
"Sure an it's a hat--a sthraw hat," said Pat.
Captain Corbet exchanged a meaning glance with Phil.
"Do you think it's HIS hat?" asked Phil.
"Whose else can it be?"
Phil was silent, and his gaze was once more directed to the
floating object. As it rose and fell on the waves, it showed the
unmistakable outline of a straw hat, and was quite near enough for
them to recognize its general character and color. It was dark,
with the edges rather ragged, a broad brim, and a roomy crown, not
by any means of a fashionable or graceful shape, but coarse, and
big, and roomy, and shabby--just such a hat as Solomon had put on
his head when he left Grand Pre with them on this memorable and
ill-fated voyage.
They looked at it for a long time in silence, and none of them
moved.
Captain Corbet heaved a deep sigh.
"This here," said he, "has been a eventfool vyge. I felt a derred
persentment afore I started. Long ago I told you how the finger of
destiny seemed to warn me away from the ocean main. I kem to the
conclusion, you remember, that henceforth I was to dwell under my
own vine an fig tree, engaged in the tender emplymint of nussin the
infant. But from this I was forced agin my own inclynations. An
what's the result? Why, this--that thar hat! See here, boys;" and
the venerable seaman's tone grew deeper, and more solemn, and more
impressive; "see here, boys," he repeated; "for mor'n forty year
hev I follered the seas, an traversed the briny deep; but, though
I've hed my share of storms an accydints, though I've ben
shipwrecked onst or twiste, yet never has it ben my lot to
experience any loss of human life. But now, but now, boys, call to
mind the startlin events of this here vyge! Think of your
companion an playmate a driftin off in that startlin manner from
Petticoat Jack! An now look here--gaze upon that thar! Words air
footil!"
"Do you give him up, then?" cried Phil. "Poor, poor old Solomon!"
Captain Corbet shook his head.
"'Deed, thin, an I don't!" cried Pat. "What's a hat? 'Tain't a
man, so it isn't. Many's the man that's lost his hat, an ain't
lost his life. It's a windy place here, an ole Solomon's hat's a
mile too big for him, so it is--'deed an it is."
Captain Corbet shook his head more gloomily than ever.
"Ow, sure an ye needn't be shakin yer head that way. Sure an
haven't ye lost hats av yer own, over an over?"
"Never," said the captain. "I never lost a hat."
"Niver got one blowed off? 'Deed an ye must have."
"I never got one blowed off. When the wind blowed hard I allus kep
'em tied on."
"Well, Solomon hadn't any tie to his, an it cud tumble off his old
pate asy enough, so it cud. Sure he's lost it jumpin over the
rocks. Besides, where's his basket?"
"At the bottom, no doubt."
"Sure an it cud float."
"No; I dar say it was full of lobsters."
"Any how, I'll not believe he's gone till I see him," cried Pat,
earnestly. "Seein's believin."
"Ef he's gone," said Captain Corbet, more solemnly than ever,
"ye'll never see him. These waters take too good care of a man for
that."
"Well, yer all givin up too soon," said Pat. "Come along now;
there's lots of places yet to examin. Give one of yer loudest
yells."
Captain Corbet did so. In spite of his despondency as to poor old
Solomon's fate, he was not at all unwilling to try any further
chances. On this occasion he seemed to gain unusual energy out of
his very despair; and the yell that burst from him was so high, so
shrill, so piercing, and so far penetrating, that the former cries
were nothing compared to it.
"Well done!" cried Pat. "Sure an you bet yerself that time, out an
out."
"Stop!" cried Phil. "Listen. What's that?"
Far away, as they listened, they heard a faint cry, that seemed
like a response.
"Is that the echo?" asked Phil, anxiously.
"Niver an echo!" cried Pat, excitedly. "Shout agin, captain,
darlin."
Captain Corbet gave another shout as loud and as shrill as the
preceding one.
They listened anxiously.
Again they heard the cry. It was faint and far off; yet it was
unmistakably a human cry. Their excitement now grew intense.
"Where did it come from?" cried Phil.
"Wal, it kine o' seemed to me that it came back thar," said the
captain, pointing to the woods.
"'Deed an it didn't," cried Pat; "not a bit of it. It was from the
shore, jest ahead; from the pint, so it was, or I'm a nagur."
"I think it came from the shore, too," said Phil; "but it seemed to
be behind us."
"Niver a bit," cried Pat; "not back there. We've been there, an
whoever it was wud have shouted afore, so he wud. No, it's ahead
at the pint. He's jest heard us, an he's shoutin afther us.
Hooray! Hurry up, an we'll be there in time to save him."
Pat's confidence was not without its effect on the others. Without
waiting any longer, they at once set off at a run, stopping at
intervals to yell, and then listening for a response. To their
delight, that response came over and over again; and to their still
greater joy, the sound each time was evidently louder.
Beyond a doubt, they were drawing nearer to the place from which
the sounds came.
This stimulated them all the more, so that they hurried on faster.
The edge of the cliff was not covered by any trees, but the ground
at its summit had been cleared, so that progress was not at all
difficult. They therefore did not take much time in traversing the
space that intervened between the spot where they had first heard
the cry, and the point where the cliff terminated. The cry grew
steadily louder, all the way, until at last, when they approached
the point, it seemed to come directly from beneath.
The cliff here was perpendicular for about forty feet down, and
below this it seemed to retreat, so that nothing could be seen.
The tide was on the ebb; but it was still so high that its waves
beat below them, and seemed to strike the base of the rock.
Beyond, on the right, there was a sloping ledge, which descended
from the cliffs into the sea, over which the waves were now
playing.
It was from the hollow and unseen recess down at the foot of the
cliff that the cry seemed to arise, which had come in response to
the calls of those on the summit. On reaching the place above,
they knelt down, and looked over, but were not able to distinguish
any human being, or any sign of the presence of one. But as they
looked anxiously over, the cry arose, not very loud, but quite
distinct now, and assured them that this was the place which
sheltered the one who had uttered that cry.
Captain Corbet now thrust his head over as far as he could, and
gave a call in his loudest voice.
"Hal-lo-o-o-o-o-o-o-o-o-o-o-o!"
To which there came up in answer a cry that sounded like--
"Hi-i-i-i-i-i-i-i-i!"
"Solomo-o-o-o-o-o-o-o-on!"
"He-e-e-e-e-e-e-e-e-ey!"
"Is that yo-o-o-o-o-o-o-o-o-ou?"
"It's me-e-e-e-e-e-e-e-e-e!"
"Where are y-o-o-o-o-o-o-o-o-ou?"
"He-e-e-e-e-e-e-e-e-e-e-re!"
"Come u-u-u-u-u-u-u-up!"
"Ca-a-a-a-a-a-a-a-a-a-n't!"
"Why no-o-o-o-o-o-o-o-o-ot?"
"Too hi-i-i-i-i-i-i-i-i-gh!"
"Go round the pi-i-i-i-i-i-nt!"
"Too high ti-i-i-i-i-i-i-i-de!"
"Wa-a-a-a-a-a-a-a-a-a-a-it!"
"All ri-i-i-i-i-i-i-i-ght!"
Captain Corbet now sprang up as nimbly as a young lad, and looked
at Phil and Pat with an expression of such exceeding triumph, that
his face seemed fairly to shine.
"It IS Solomon!" he cried. But it was of no use for him to convey
that piece of information to the boys, who already knew that fact
quite as well as he did.
"It IS Solomon," he repeated; "an now the pint is, how air we to
git him up?"
"Let me go down," said Pat.
"How?"
"Sure an I can git down wid that bit o' rope you have."
"Mebbe you can, an then agin mebbe you can't; but s'posin you was
to git down, how upon airth would that help the matter?"
"Sure an we cud give him a pull up."
"I don't think we could manage that," said Captain Corbet, "and you
couldn't, at any rate, if you were down thar with him. As far as I
see, we'll hev to wait till the tide falls."
"Wouldn't it be better," said Phil, "for us to go around, so as to
come nearer?"
"How? Whar?"
"Why, down to the beach, and then we could walk around the point."
"Walk? Why, it's high water."
"So it is--I forgot that."
"The fact is, we can't git any nearer than we air now. Then, agin,
the boys'll be along in a boat soon. They ought to be here by this
time; so let's sit down here, an wait till they heave in sight."
With a call of encouragement to Solomon which elicited a reply of
satisfaction, Captain Corbet sat down upon the grass, and the boys
followed his example. In this position they waited quietly for the
boat to come.
Meanwhile, Bart and Bruce had hurried on as rapidly as their legs
could carry them, and at length reached the path which went down to
the beach. Down this they scrambled, and not long afterwards they
reached the ship-yard. Here they obtained a boat without any
difficulty, which the workmen launched for them; and then they
pushed off, and pulled for the point, with the intention of rowing
along opposite the shore, and narrowly inspecting it.
Scarcely had they reached the point, however, when a loud and well-
known voice sounded from on high. They both turned and looked up,
still pulling. There they saw Captain Corbet, and Phil, and Pat,
all of whom were shouting and making furious gestures at them.
"We've found him! Come in closer!" cried Captain Corbet.
"Whe-e-e-re?" cried Bruce.
But before any answer could come, a loud, shrill scream, followed
by a yell of delight, burst forth from some place still nearer.
Burt and Bruce both started, and looked towards the place from
which this last cry came.
There a very singular and pleasing sight met their eyes.
About six feet above the water was a shelf of rock, that ran down
sloping to the beach, and over this there projected a great mass of
the cliff. In this recess there crouched a familiar figure. He
had no hat, but between his legs, as he sat there, he held a
basket, to which he clung with his knees and his hands. As he sat
there his eyes were fixed upon them, and their whites seemed
enlarged to twice their ordinary dimensions, while yell after yell
came from him.
"Help, he-e-e-e-e-lp! Mas'r Ba-a-a-a-a-a-a-a-art! O, Mas'r Ba-a-
a-a-a-a-a-a-a-art! He-e-e-e-e-e-e-e-e-e-lp! Sa-a-a-a-a-a-a-a-a-a-
a-a-a-a-a-ave me!"
"Hurrah! hurrah!" cried Bart and Bruce, in a burst of heartfelt
joy.
"He-e-e-e-e-e-e-e-e-e-lp!" came forth once more from Solomon.
"All right," cried Bart; and at once the boat pointed towards the
place where Solomon was sitting. The water nearer the shore was
somewhat rough, but fortunately there were no rocks just there, and
they were able to bring the boat in close to the place where
Solomon was confined. At their approach Solomon moved slowly down
the incline of the rock, on his hands and knees, for there was not
room for him to stand upright; and as he moved he pushed the basket
before him, as though there was something inside of uncommon value.
Reaching, at length, a spot where the rock was about the level of
the boat, he waited for them to approach. Soon the boat touched
the rock.
"Come, old Sol," cried Bart, "jump in!"
"Hyah, take hole ob dis yar," said Solomon, even in that moment of
rescue refusing to move till his precious basket should be safe.
Bart grasped it, and put it into the boat, noticing, as he did so,
that it was full of lobsters.
"Come, Solomon, hurry up. I don't like the boat to be knocking
here this way."
"All right, sah," said Solomon, crawling along rather stiffly; "ben
tied up in a knot all day, an feel so stiff dat I don't know as
I'll git untied agin fur ebber mo. Was jest makin my will, any
way, as you came along."
By this time Solomon had tumbled into the boat, and worked his way
aft, though not without many groans.
"It's de cold rocks, an de wet," he groaned. "Sech an attack o'
rheumaticses as dis ole nigga's gwine to hab beats all! Any how, I
ben an sabed de lobsta. Loss me ole hat, but didn't car a mite fer
dat so long as I sabed de lobsta."
"All right," cried Bart; and at this the two boys pulled away from
the rocks and rounded the point. As they came into the sight of
those who were waiting on the top of the cliff, a shout of joy
arose.
XV.
Exploring Juan Fernandez.--The Cliffs.--The tangled Underbrush.--
The Fog Bank.--Is it coming or going?--The Steamer.--Vain Appeals.--
New Plans.
Starting off, as we have seen, to explore the island, Tom first
directed his steps towards the elevated land which has before been
mentioned. At first his path was easy, and the descent very
gradual; but at length it became more difficult, and he had to
ascend a steep hill, which was over-strewn with stones and
interspersed with trees and mounds. Up among these he worked his
way, and at length the ascent ceased. He was on the summit of the
island. Here he walked to the edge of the area on which he stood,
and found himself on the edge of a precipice that went sheer down
to a beach, which was apparently two hundred feet beneath him. The
precipice seemed actually to lean forward out of the perpendicular,
and so tremendous was the view beneath, that Tom, although not by
any means inclined to be nervous, found his head grow giddy as he
looked down. Looking forth thus from his dizzy elevation, he could
see across the bay to the New Brunswick shore, and could mark the
general course which his drifting boat must have taken over those
deep, dark, and treacherous waters.
The sea was broad, and blue, and tranquil, and desolate, for even
from this commanding height not a sail was visible. There was
nothing here which could attract Tom's attention for any long
period; so he prepared to continue his progress. In front of him
lay a wood, before plunging in which he turned to see if there were
any vessels coming through the Straits of Minas. None were
visible; so, turning back once more, he resumed his journey, and
went forward among the trees.
His path now became a difficult one. It was necessary to keep away
from the edge of the cliff, but still not to go out of sight of it.
The trees were principally spruce and fir, but there were also
birch and maple. He also noticed mountain ash and willow. Beneath
him all the ground was covered with soft moss, in which he sank to
his ankles, while on every side were luxuriant ferns and evergreen
trailers. Tom recognized all these with great satisfaction, for
they showed him the means of furnishing for himself a soft couch,
that might be envied by many a man in better circumstances.
Progress soon grew more difficult, for there were numerous mounds,
and dense underbrush, through which he could only force his way by
extreme effort. Windfalls also lay around in all directions, and
no sooner would he have fairly surmounted one of them, than another
would appear. Thus his progress was exceedingly slow and
laborious.
After about a half an hour of strenuous exertion, Tom found himself
in the midst of an almost impassable jungle of tangled, stunted fir
trees. He tried to avoid these by making a detour, but found that
they extended so far that he could only pass them by going along
close to the edge of the cliff. This last path he chose, and
clinging to the branches, he passed for more than a hundred yards
along the crest of a frightful precipice, where far down there
yawned an abyss, at whose bottom was the sea; while abreast of him
in the air there floated great flocks of gulls, uttering their
hoarse yells, and fluttering fiercely about, as though trying to
drive back this intruder upon their domains. Once or twice Tom was
compelled to stop, and turn away his face from the abyss, and
thrust himself in among the trees; but each time he regained his
courage, after a little rest, and went on as before.
At length he passed the thick spruce underbrush, and found the
woods less dense. He could now work his way among them without
being compelled to go so close to the edge of the cliff; and the
dizzy height and the shrieks of the gulls no longer disturbed his
senses. The trees here were not so high as those at the other end
of the island, but were of much smaller size, and seemed stunted.
There were no maples or other forest trees, but only scraggy fir,
that seemed too exposed to the winds from the sea to have much
health or verdure. The underbrush was wanting to a great extent,
but moss was here in large quantities, and thick clusters of alder
bushes. Wild shrubs also--such as raspberries and blueberries--
were frequently met with; while ledges of weather-beaten rock
jutted out from amid thick coverings of moss.
Walking here was not at all difficult, and he went on without any
interruption, until, at last, he found any farther progress barred
by a precipice. He was at the lower or western end of the island.
He looked down, and found beneath him a great precipice, while
rocks jutted out from the sea, and ledges projected beyond. The
gulls were present here, as elsewhere, in great flocks, and still
kept up their noisy screams.
Tom looked out over the sea, and saw its waters spread far away
till it was lost in the horizon. On the line of that horizon he
saw a faint gray cloud, that looked like a fog bank. It had, to
his eyes, a certain gloomy menace, and seemed to say to him that he
had not seen the last of it yet. On the left of the broad sea, the
Nova Scotia Coast ran along till it was lost in the distance; and
on the right was the long line of the New Brunswick shore, both of
which had now that dark hue of olive green which he had noticed on
the land opposite before he had started.
Suddenly, while he was looking, his eyes caught sight of something
white that glistened brightly from the blue water. It was about
midway between the two coasts, and he knew it at once to be some
sailing vessel. He could not make out more than one sail, and that
showed that the vessel was either coming up the bay or going down;
for if it had been crossing, she would, of course, have lain
broadside on to his present locality, and would have thus displayed
two sails to his view. The sight of this vessel agitated him
exceedingly; and the question about her probable course now entered
his mind, and drove away all other thoughts. Whether that vessel
were going up or down became of exclusive importance to him now, if
she were coming up, she might approach him, and hear his hail, or
catch sight of his signals. Suddenly he reflected that he had no
way of attracting attention, and a wild desire of running back and
setting up the longest pole or board that he could find came into
his mind; but such was the intensity of his curiosity, and the
weight of his suspense, that he could not move from the spot where
he was until he had satisfied himself as to the vessel's course.
He sat down not far from the edge of the precipice, and, leaning
forward with his hands supporting his chin, he strained his eyes
over the intervening distance, as he tried to make out in which way
the vessel was going. It seemed fully ten miles away, and her hull
was not visible. It was only the white of her sails that he saw;
and as the sunlight played on these from time to time, or fell off
from the angle of reflection, the vessel was alternately more or
less visible, and thus seemed by turns to draw nearer and depart
farther from his sight.
Thus for a long time he sat, alternately hoping and desponding, at
every play of those sails in the sunlight. The calm of the water
showed him that, even if the vessel were coming up, he could not
expect any very rapid progress. There was now no wind, and the
surface of the water was perfectly unruffled. Besides, he knew
that the tide was falling rapidly. How, then, could he expect that
the vessel could come any nearer, even if she were trying to?
Thoughts like these at last made him only anxious to keep the
vessel in sight. If her destination lay up the bay, she would
probably anchor; if it lay down the bay, she would drift with the
tide. He thought, then, that if she only would remain in sight, it
would be a sufficient proof of her course.
Thus he sat, watching and waiting, with all his soul intent upon
those flashing sails, and all his thoughts taken up with the
question as to the course of that solitary bark. It seemed a long
time to him, in his suspense; but suspense always makes time seem
long. At last, however, even though he hoped so persistently for
the best, his hope began to die within him. Fainter and fainter
grew those sails; at intervals rarer and rarer did their flash come
to his eyes, until at length the sight of them was lost altogether,
and nothing met his eyes but the gloomy gray of the fog cloud on
the far horizon.
Even after he had lost hope, and become convinced that she was
gone, Tom sat there for a long time, in a fixed attitude, looking
at that one spot. He would have sat there longer, but suddenly
there came to his ears a peculiar sound, which made him start to
his feet in a moment, and filled him with a new excitement.
He listened.
The sound came again.
A flush of joy spread over his face, his heart beat faster and
faster, and he listened as though he could scarce believe his
senses.
As he listened, the sounds came again, and this time much louder.
There was now no mistake about it. It was a regular boat, which
Tom knew well to be the peculiar sound made by the floats of a
steamer's paddles. He had often heard it. He had but recently
heard it, when the revenue steamer was approaching the Antelope,
and again during the foggy night, when the whistle roused them, and
the same beat of the paddles came over the midnight waters.
And now, too, he heard it.
He gave a shout of joy, and started off to catch sight of her.
For a few paces only he ran, and then stopped.
He was puzzled. He did not know in which direction it was best to
go. He was at the west end of the island, but could not make out
very well the direction of the sounds. He tried to think whether
the steamer would pass the island on the north side or the south.
He did not know, but it seemed to him that she would certainly go
to the north of it. There was no time to be lost, and standing
there to listen did not seem to be of any use, even if his
impatience had allowed him to do so. Accordingly he hurried back
by the way that he had come along the north side of the island.
For some time he ran along through the trees, and at length, in
about fifteen or twenty minutes, he reached the place where the
dense underbrush was, by the edge of the cliff. From this point a
wide view was commanded. On reaching it he looked out, and then up
the bay, towards the Straits of Minas. He could see almost up to
the straits, but no steamer appeared. For a moment he stood
bewildered, and then the thought came to him, that he had mistaken
altogether the steamer's course. She could not be coming down on
the north side of the island, but on the south side. With a cry of
grief he started back again, mourning over his error, and the time
that he had lost. On reaching the more open wood, he thought that
it would be better to hurry across the island to the south side,
and proceeded at once to do so. The way was rough and tedious.
Once or twice he had to burst through thickets of alder, and
several times he had to climb over windfalls. At length, in his
confusion, he lost his way altogether; he had to stop and think.
The shadows of the trees showed him where the south lay, and he
resumed his journey. At length, after most exhaustive efforts, he
reached a part of the cliff, where a fringe of alders grew so
thick, that he was scarce aware that he was at his destination,
until the precipice opened beneath him. Here he stood, and,
pressing apart the dense branches, he looked out.
There was the steamer, about two miles off, already below where he
was standing, and going rapidly down the bay with the falling tide.
Another cry of grief burst from Tom. Where he was standing he
could see the vessel, but he himself was completely concealed by
the clustering bushes. He now lamented that he had left his first
position, and saw that his only chance was to have remained there.
To stay where he was could not be thought of. There was scarce a
chance now of doing anything, since the steamer was so far away;
but what chance there was certainly depended on his being in some
conspicuous position. He started off, therefore, to the west
point, where he had watched the schooner for so long a time. He
hurried on with undiminished energy, and bounded over windfalls,
and burst through thickets, as before. But in spite of his
efforts, his progress could not be more rapid than it had formerly
been. His route was necessarily circuitous, and before he could
find the desired point, many more minutes had elapsed.
But he reached it at last, and there, on the bare rock, springing
forward, he waved his hat in the air, and sent forth a piercing cry
for help. But the steamer was now as much as four or five miles
away--too far altogether for his loudest cry to go. His screams
and his gestures did not appear to attract the slightest attention.
She moved on her way right under the eyes of the frantic and
despairing boy, nor did she change her course in the slightest
degree, nor did her paddles cease to revolve, but went rolling
round, tossing up the foam, and bearing far, far away that boat on
which poor Tom had rested his last hope.
As for Tom, he kept up his screams as long as he could utter a
sound. He tore off his coat, and shook it up and down, and waved
it backward and forward. But none of these things were heard or
seen. The steamboat passed on, until, at length, even Tom became
convinced that further efforts were useless.
This last blow was too much. Tom sank under it, and, falling on
his face, he burst into a flood of tears.
Struggling up at length from this last affliction, Tom roused
himself, and his buoyancy of soul began once more to assert itself.
"Come now, Thomas, my son," said he, as he dried his eyes, "this
sort of thing will never do, you know. You're not a baby, my boy;
you've never been given to blubbering, I think. Cheer up, then,
like a man, and don't make me feel ashamed of you."
This little address to himself had, as before, the effect of
restoring his equanimity, and he thought with calmness upon his
recent disappointments.
He saw, by the passage of these vessels, what he had for a time
lost sight of, namely, that this island, though uninhabited, was
still in the middle of a bay which was constantly traversed by
sailing vessels and steamboats. The latter ran regularly up to
the Basin of Minas from St. John. As to the former, they were
constantly passing to and fro, from the large ship down to the
small fishing vessel. Inhabited countries surrounded him on every
side, between the coasts of which there was a constant communication.
If he only kept patient, the time must come, and that, too, before
very long, when he would be delivered.
In order to secure this delivery, however, he saw that it would be
necessary to arrange some way by which he might attract the notice
of passing vessels. On this subject he meditated for a long time.
It would be necessary, he thought, to have some sort of a signal in
some conspicuous place. Among the drift-wood he might, perhaps, be
able to find some sort of a pole or staff which he could set up.
One might not be enough, but in that case he could put up two, or
three, or half a dozen.
The next thing to decide about was the choice of a place. There
was the east end, and the west end--which was the better? The west
end, where he was standing, was high; but then it was surrounded by
trees, and unless he could set up a very tall staff, it could
scarcely be noticed. The east end, on the contrary, was lower; but
then it was bare, and any kind of a signal which might be set up
there could hardly fail to attract attention. He could also pile
up a heap of drift-wood, and set fire to it, and, by this means, if
a vessel were passing by, he could be certain of securing
attention. It did not make much difference which end the signals
were placed upon, as far as referred to the passing of vessels; for
all that passed by would go along the island, so that both ends
would be visible to them.
As to the signals, he felt confident that he could find a staff,
or, if one would not be long enough, several could be fastened
together. The coil of rope in the boat would enable him to do
this. The sail would afford material for a flag.
All these plans came to his mind as he stood there; and the
prospect of once more doing something which was to help him to
escape from his prison drove away the last vestige of his grief.
His courage again arose, hope revived, and he burst forth into a
light and joyous song. Very different was he now from the
despairing lad who, but a short time before, had been pouring forth
his tears of sorrow; and yet but a few minutes had passed since
then. The steamer was yet in sight down the bay, but Tom, who had
lately been so frantic in his efforts to attract her attention, now
cast a glance after her of perfect indifference.
And now it was necessary for him to return to the east end of the
island, and look about for the means of putting into execution his
plan for making a signal.
He started off on his return without any further delay. The path
back was as rough and toilsome as the way down had been; but Tom
was now full of hope, and his elastic spirits had revived so
thoroughly that he cared but little for the fatigue of the journey.
It was traversed at last, and he descended the slope to the place
from which he had started.
His exploration of the island had been quite complete. It seemed
to him to be about a mile and a half in length, and a half a mile
or so in width. The east end, where he had first arrived, was the
only place where it was at all desirable to stay.
Immediately on his arrival he examined the boat, and found it
secure. To his surprise it was now about sunset. He had forgotten
the lapse of time. He was hungry; so he sat down, ate his biscuit,
drank his water, and rested from the toils of the day.
XVI.
A Sign for the outer World.--A Shelter for the Outcast's Head.--
Tom's Camp and Camp-bed.--A Search after Something to vary a too
monotonous Diet.--Brilliant Success.
Tom sat down after his eventful day, and took his evening meal, as
has been said. He rested then for some time. His excessive labors
had fatigued him less than the great excitement which he had
undergone, and now he felt disinclined to exert himself. But the
sun had set, and darkness was coming on rapidly; so he rose, at
last, and went over to the drift-wood. Here, after a search of
about half an hour, he found something which was very well suited
to his purpose. It was a piece of scantling about twenty feet
long, and not very thick; and to this he saw that he could fasten
the pole that he had made up in the woods. These two pieces would
make, when joined, a very good flag-staff. These he brought up to
the bank. Then he collected an armful of dry chips and sticks,
which he carried over to a spot near where the boat lay. A rock
was there, and against one side of this he built a pile of the
chips. He then tried a match, and found that it was quite dry, and
lighted it without any difficulty. With this he kindled the fire,
and soon saw, with great satisfaction, a bright and cheerful blaze.
He was so delighted with the fire that he brought up a dozen more
loads of wood, which he laid near. Then he drew up the bit of
scantling, and bringing the coil of rope, he cut a piece off, and
proceeded to fasten to the scantling the pole which he had procured
in the woods. He did this by winding the rope around in a close
and even wind; and, finally, on concluding his task, he found that
it was bound firmly enough to stand any breeze. It took a long
time to finish this; but Tom had slept late in the morning, and,
though fatigued, he was not sleepy. After this he sat down in
front of the fire, and enjoyed its friendly light and its genial
glow. He kept heaping on the fuel, and the bright flames danced
up, giving to him the first approach to anything like the feeling
of comfort that he had known since he had drifted away from the
Antelope. Nor was it comfort only that he was mindful of while he
watched and fed the fire. He saw in this fire, as it shone out
over the water, the best kind of a signal, and had some hope of
being seen and hailed by some passing vessel. In this hope he sat
up till midnight, looking out from time to time over the water, and
expecting every instant to see the shadow of some approaching
vessel.
But midnight came, and Tom at length thought of sleep. The sail
had dried thoroughly through the day; so now he used it once more
as a coverlet, and, folding himself in it, he reclined, as before,
against the mossy bank, and slept.
On awaking the next day, he arose and looked around. To his deep
disappointment, he could see nothing. There was a fog over all the
scene. The wind had changed, and his old enemy was once more
besieging him. It was not so thick, indeed, as it had been, being
light and dry, so that the ground was not at all moistened; but
still the view was obscured, so that no vessel could be seen unless
it came within half a mile; and that was rather closer than most
vessels would care to come to his island.
This day was Sunday, and all Tom's plans had to be deferred until
the following day. However, it was not at all disagreeable to him
to get rid of the necessity of work; and, indeed, never before did
he fully appreciate the nature of the Day of Rest. The rest was
sweet indeed to his exhausted and overworn frame, and he did not go
far away from his fire. He had found some embers still glowing in
the morning, and had kindled the fire anew from these, without
drawing any more upon his precious store of matches. He resolved
now to keep the coals alive all the time, by feeding the fire
during the day, and covering it up with ashes by night.
It was Sunday,--the Day of Rest,--and Tom felt all the blessedness
of rest. On the whole, it turned out to be the pleasantest day
which he had known since he left the schooner. Left now to quiet
reflection, he recalled the events of the last week, and had more
leisure to feel thankful over the wonderful safety which he had met
with. Even now on the island he was not without his comforts. He
had food and warmth. So, on the whole, though he had his moments
of sadness, yet the sadness was driven out by cheerfulness. It was
not all dismal. The words of that poem which is familiar to every
school-boy rang in his ears:--
"O, Solitude, where are the charms
That sages have seen in thy face?
Better dwell in the midst of alarms
Than reign in this horrible place."
Yet these words were accompanied and counterbalanced by the more
pleasing and consoling sentiments of others, which on this day
accorded better with Tom's mood:--
"There's mercy in every place;
And mercy--encouraging thought!--
Gives even affliction a grace,
And reconciles man to his lot."
Nothing occurred during the day to disturb the quiet of the island,
and Tom went to bed early that night, so as to have a long sleep,
and fortify himself for the labors of the morrow. The ashes were
raked carefully round the coals, which, when Tom waked in the
morning, were easily kindled again.
He was up early on that Monday morning. He saw, with deep
disappointment, that the fog still covered every thing, and that
the wind was blowing quite brisk from the south-west, and raising
rather a heavy sea. But he had a great deal to do now, and to this
he turned his attention.
First of all, he had to finish his signal-staff and set it up. He
was very much troubled about the proper material for a flag. The
canvas was rather too heavy; but as he had nothing else, he had to
take this. He fastened a bit of the rope to the head of the staff,
so as to form a loop, and through this he ran a piece which was
long enough to serve for halyards. Thus far he had not used up
more than a quarter of the coil of rope; but he needed all that was
left for other purposes. The next thing was to set up his staff.
To do this required much labor. He had already selected the place
which seemed most suitable. It was at the extreme point of a
tongue of land which projected beside the brook, and only a little
distance from his resting-place. Here the ground was soft; and
choosing a sharp stone, he worked diligently for about a couple of
hours, until at length he succeeded in digging a hole which was
about eighteen inches in depth. Then he fastened ropes to the
staff, where the pole joined it, so that four lines came down far
enough to serve as stays. Having done this, he inserted the end of
the staff in the hole, and thrust in the earth all around it,
trampling it in, and beating it down as tight as he could with a
stone. After this he procured some sticks from the drift-wood,
and, sharpening the ends, he secured the stays by fastening them to
these sticks, which he drove into the ground. The staff then
seemed to be as secure as was necessary. It only remained now to
hoist up his flag; and this he did without any difficulty, securing
it at half mast, so that it might serve unmistakably as a signal of
distress.
Upon completing this, Tom rested on the mound, and from that
distance he contemplated the signal with a great deal of calm and
quiet satisfaction. It was his own device, and his own handiwork,
and he was very proud of it. But he did not allow himself a long
rest. There yet remained much to be done, and to this he now
directed his attention.
He had been thinking, during his last employment, upon the
necessity which he had of some shelter. A plan had suggested
itself which he felt confident that he could carry into execution
without any very great trouble. The fog that now prevailed, and
which was far different from the light mist of the previous day,
accompanied also, as it was, by the damp south-west wind, made some
sort of a shelter imperatively necessary, and that, too, before
another night. To pass this night in the fog would be bad enough;
but if it should happen to rain also, his situation would be
miserable indeed.
He now set out for the beach, and found, without much difficulty,
some pieces of wood which were necessary to his purpose. Bringing
these back, he next looked about for a good situation. There was a
rock not far from the fire, and in front of this was a smooth spot,
where the land was flat, and covered with short grass. On the left
it sloped to the brook. This seemed to him to be the best place on
the island. It was sufficiently sheltered. It was dry, and in
case of rain the water would not be likely to flood it. With all
these it also possessed the advantage of being sufficiently
conspicuous to any passing vessel which might be attracted by the
signal-staff. Here, then, Tom determined to erect his place of
residence.
His first work was to select two long and slender pieces of wood,
and sharpen the ends of them. Then he drove each of them into the
ground in such a way that their tops crossed one another. These he
bound fast together. Two other stakes were driven into the ground,
and secured in the same way, about six or seven feet off. Another
long piece of scantling was then placed so as to pass from one to
the other of the two crossed sticks, so that it rested upon them.
This last was bound tight to the crossed sticks, and thus the whole
structure formed a camp-shaped frame.
Over this Tom now threw the sail, and brought it down to the ground
on either side, securing it there with pegs. At the back of the
camp a piece of the sail was folded over and secured so as to cover
it in; while in front another piece of the sail hung down until it
nearly reached the ground. This could hang down at night, and be
folded over the top by day. Tom now tore up some sods, and laid
them over the edge of the canvas on each side, where it touched the
ground, and placed on these heavy stones, until at length it seemed
sufficiently protected from the entrance of any rain that might
flow down the roof. His last task consisted in collecting a large
quantity of moss and ferns from the woods, which he strewed over
the ground inside, and heaped up at one end, so as to form a soft
and fragrant bed. When this was accomplished the camp was
finished.
It had taken a long time, and when at last the work was done, it
began to grow dark. Tom noticed this with surprise. He had been
working so incessantly that he was not mindful of the flight of
time, and now the day was done, and the evening was upon him before
he was aware. But there were other things still for him to do
before he could rest from his labors. His fire was just flickering
around its last embers, and if he wished to have a pleasant light
to cheer the solitude and the darkness of his evening hours, it
would be necessary to prepare a supply of fuel. To this he
attended at once, and brought up several armfuls of drift-wood from
the beach. Placing these near the fire, he kindled it up afresh,
and flung upon the rising flames a generous supply of fuel. The
fires caught at it, and crackled as they spread through the dry
wood, and tossed up their forked tongues on high, till in the dusk
of evening they illuminated the surrounding scene with a pleasant
light. A few more armfuls were added, and then the work for the
day was over. That work had been very extensive and very
important. It had secured a means of communication with the outer
world, and had also formed a shelter from the chill night air, the
fog, and the storm. It was with a very natural pride that Tom cast
his eyes around, and surveyed the results of his ingenuity and his
industry.
The camp opened towards the fire, from which it was not so far
distant but that Tom could attend to it without any very great
inconvenience. The fire shone pleasantly before him as he sat down
at his evening repast. As the darkness increased, it threw a
ruddier glow upon all the scene around, lighting up field and hill,
and sending long streams of radiance into the fog that overhung the
sea. Tom had prepared an unusually large supply of fuel, this
evening, for the express purpose of burning it all up; partly for
his own amusement, and partly in the hope that it might meet the
eyes of some passing navigator. It was his only hope. To keep his
signals going by night and day was the surest plan of effecting a
speedy escape. Who could tell what might be out on the neighboring
sea? How did he know but that the Antelope might be somewhere near
at hand, with his companions on board, cruising anxiously about in
search after the missing boat? He never ceased to think that they
were following after him somewhere, and to believe that, in the
course of their wanderings, they might come somewhere within sight
of him. He knew that they would never give him up till they
assuredly knew his fate, but would follow after him, and set other
vessels on the search, till the whole bay, with all its shores and
islands, should be thoroughly ransacked.
Fortunate was it for him, he thought, that there was so large a
supply of drift-wood at hand on the beach, dry, portable, and in
every way convenient for use. Thanks to this, he might now
disperse the gloom of dark and foggy nights, and keep up a better
signal in the dark than he could do in the light. Thus the fuel
was heaped on, and the fire flamed up, and Tom sat near, looking
complacently upon the brilliant glow.
Thus far, for nearly a week, he had fed on biscuit only; but now,
as he ate his repast, he began to think that it was a very
monotonous fare, and to wonder whether it might not be possible to
find something which could give a zest to his repasts. The biscuit
were holding out well, but still he felt a desire to husband his
resources, and if any additional food could in any way be procured,
it would not only be a relish, but would also lessen his demand
upon his one sole source of supply. He thought earnestly upon the
subject of fish. He turned his thoughts very seriously to the
subject of fish-hooks, and tried to think of some way by which he
could capture some of the fish with which these waters abounded.
But this idea did not seem to promise much. In the first place, he
could think of no possible way in which he could procure any
serviceable hook; in the second place, even if he had a hook and
line all ready and baited, he did not see how he would be able to
cast it within reach of any fish. His boat would not float him
even for the little distance that was required to get into the
places where fish might be. He could only stand upon the beach out
of their reach.
But, in the course of his thoughts, he soon perceived that other
sources of food were possible to him besides the fish that were
caught by hook and line. His mind reverted to the populous realm
of shell-fish. These were all before him. Round the rocks and
amid the sea-weed there certainly must be mussels. At low tide,
amid the ledges and the sand, there surely must be some lobsters.
Before him there was an extensive mud flat, where there ought to be
clams. Here was his fire, always ready, by night and by day. Why
should he not be able to make use of that fire, not only for
cheering his mind, and giving him warmth, and signaling to passers-
by, but also for cooking his meals?
This was the question that he asked himself as he ate his biscuit.
He could not see why he should not be able to accomplish this. As
far as he could see, there ought to be plenty of shell-fish of
various kinds on these shores. The more he thought of it, the more
probable it seemed. He determined to solve the difficulty as soon
as possible. On former occasions he had arranged his work on the
evening for the succeeding day. On this evening he marked out this
work for the morrow, and arranged in his mind a comprehensive and
most diligent search for shell-fish, which should embrace the whole
circuit of the island.
With this in his mind, he arranged the fire as usual, so as to keep
it alive, and then retired to his camp for the night. The presence
of a roof over his head was grateful in the extreme. He let down
the canvas folds over the entrance, and felt a peculiar sense of
security and comfort. The moss and ferns which he had heaped up
were luxuriously soft and deliciously fragrant. Over these he
stretched his wearied limbs with a sigh of relief, and soon was
asleep.
So comfortable was his bed, and so secure his shelter, that he
slept longer than usual. It was late when he awaked. He hurried
forth and looked around. The fog still rested over everything. If
possible it was thicker and more dismal than even on the preceding
day. To his surprise, he soon noticed that it had been raining
quite heavily through the night. Around, in many places, he saw
pools of water, and in the hollows of the rocks he saw the same.
This could only have been done by the rain. Going back to his
camp, he saw that the canvas was quite wet. And yet the rain had
all rolled off. Not a drop had entered. The moss and the fern
inside were perfectly dry, and he had not the slightest feeling of
dampness about him. His camp was a complete success.
He now went off to search for clams. The tide had been high at
about six in the morning. It was now, as he judged, about ten or
eleven, and the water was quite low. Selecting a piece of shingle
from his wood-pile, he walked down over the mud flat that extended
from the point, and, after going a little distance, he noticed the
holes that give indications of the presence of clams beneath.
Turning up the sand, he soon threw out some of them. He now dug in
several different places, and obtained sufficient for the day.
These he carried back to the bank in triumph. Then he stirred up
his fire, heaped on plenty of wood, and arranged his clams in front
so as to roast them.
In spite of Mrs. Pratt's theories, the clams were found by Tom to
be delicious, and gave such relish to the biscuit, that he began to
think whether he could not make use of the baling dipper, and make
a clam chowder.
This breakfast was a great success, and Tom now confidently
expected to find other shell-fish, by means of which his resources
might be enlarged and improved.
XVII.
Solomon's solemn Tale.--A costly Lobster.--Off again.--Steam
Whistles of all Sizes.--A noisy Harbor.--Arrival Home.--No News.
The shout of joy uttered by those on the top of the cliff at seeing
old Solomon safe was responded to by those in the boat; and then,
as the latter went on her way, Captain Corbet set out to return to
the beach, followed by Phil and Pat. Soon they were all reunited,
and, the boat being landed, they returned in triumph to the
Antelope.
On their way back, Solomon told them the story of his adventures.
"Went out," said he, "on a splorin scursion, cos I was termined to
try an skewer somethin to make a dinnah to keep up de sperrit ob
dis yah party. Ben trouble nuff, an dat's no reason why we should
all starb. I tought by de looks ob tings dar was lobstas somewhar
long dis yah sho, an if I got a chance, I knowed I could get 'em.
Dar was lots ob time too, ef it hadn't ben fur dat ar pint; dat's
what knocked me. Lots o' lobstas--could hab picked up a barl full,
ony hadn't any barl to pick up."
"Well, but how did you happen to get caught?"
"Dat ar's jes what I'm a comin to. You see, I didn't tink ob dat
ar pint when I went up de sho,--but knowed I had lots ob time; so I
jes tought I'd make sure ob de best ob de lobstas. Wan't goin to
take back any common lobstas,--bet you dat,--notin for me but de
best,--de bery best ones dar. Dat ar's what kep me. It takes a
heap ob time an car to get de best ones, when dar's a crowd lyin
about ob all sizes, an de water comin in too."
"But didn't you see that the tide was coming up to the point?"
"Nebber see a see,--not a see; lookin ober de lobstas all de time,
an mos stracted wid plexity cos I couldn't cide bout de best ones.
Dar was lots an lots up dar at one place, dough I didn't go fur,--
but ef I'd gone fur, I'd hab got better ones."
"How far did you go?"
"Not fur,--ony short distance,--didn't want to go too fur away for
feah ob not gittin back in time. An so I started to come back
pooty soon, an walked, an walked. Las, jes as I got to de pint, I
rose my ole head, an looked straight afore me, an thar, clar ef I
didn't fine myself shut in,--reglar prison,--mind I tell you,--an
all round me a reglar cumferince ob water an rock, widout any way
ob scape. Tell you what, if dar ebber was a ole rat in a trap, I
was at dat ar casion."
"Couldn't you have waded through it before it got too high?"
"Waded? Not a wade; de water was rough an deep, an de bottom was
stones dat I'd slipped oba an almost broke my ole head, sides bein
drownded as dead as a herrin. Why, what you tink dis ole nigga's
made ob? I'm not a steam injine, nor a mowin machine, nor a life
boat. I'm ony a ole man, an shaky in de legs too,--mind I tell
you."
"Well, how did you manage it?"
"Manage! Why, I didn't manage at all."
"How did you find that place where you were sitting?"
"Wasn't settin. I was tied up in a knot, or rolled up into a ball.
Any way, I wasn't settin."
"Well, how did you find the place?"
"Wal, I jes got up dar. I stood on de sho till de water drobe me,
an I kep out ob its way till at las I found myself tied up de way
you saw me."
"Why didn't you halloo?"
"Hollar? Didn't I hollar like all possessed?"
"We didn't hear you."
"Wal, dat ar's dredful sterious. An me a hollarin an a yellin like
mad. Tell you what, I felt as ef I'd bust my ole head open, I did
yell that hard."
"Couldn't you manage to climb up that cliff?"
"Dat cliff? Climb up? Me? What! me climb up a cliff? an dat
cliff? Why, I couldn't no more climb up dat ar cliff dan I could
fly to de moon. No, sah. Much as I could do to keep whar I was,
out ob de water. Dat was enough."
"Don't you know that we walked two miles up the shore?"
"Two miles! Two! De sakes, now, chil'en! did you, railly? Ef I'd
a ony knowed you war a comin so near, wouldn't I a yelled? I bet I
would."
"Why, you didn't think we'd have left you."
"Lef me? Nebber. But den I didn't tink you'd magine anyting was
wrong till too late. What I wanted was help, den an dar. De
trouble was, when you did come, you all made dat ar circumbendibus,
an trabelled clean an clar away from me."
"We thought at first you could not be so near the point."
"But de pint was de whole difficulty. Dat's de pint."
"Well, at any rate, you've saved the lobsters."
"Yah! yah! yah! Yes. Bound to sabe dem dar. Loss my ole hat, an
nearly loss my ole self; but still I hung on to dem dar lobstas.
Tell you what it is now, dey come nigh onto bein de dearest lobstas
you ebber eat. I'be done a good deal in de way ob puttin myself
out to get a dinna at odd times for you, chil'en; but dis time I
almost put myself out ob dis mortial life. So when you get your
dinnas to-day, you may tink on what dat ar dinna come nigh to
costin."
"I wonder that you held on to them so tight, when they brought you
into such danger."
"Hole on? Why, dat ar's de berry reason why I did hole on. What,
let go ob dem arter all my trouble on dat count? No. I was bound
to hab somethin to show whenebber I got back, if I ebber did get
back; and so here I am, all alibe, an a bringin my lobstas wid me."
"Well, Solomon," said Bart, in a kindly tone, "old man, the
lobsters have come near costing us pretty dear, and we felt bad
enough, I can tell you, when we went up there along the shore
calling for you and getting no answer."
"What, you did car for de ole man, Mas'r Bart--did you?" said
Solomon, in a tremulous voice. Tears started to his eyes as he
said it, and all power of saying anything more seemed to depart
from him. He fell back behind the others, and walked on for the
rest of the way in silence, but at times casting upon Bart glances
that spoke volumes, and talking to himself in inaudible tones.
In this way they soon reached the wharf where the schooner was
lying.
The first thing that they noticed was, that the schooner was
aground. The tide had gone out too far for her to float away, and
consequently there was no hope of resuming their voyage for that
day.
"We're in for it, captain," said Bruce
"Yes; I felt afeard of it," said the captain. "We've got to wait
here till the next tide."
"We'll leave to-night, of course."
"O, yes. We must get off at the night's tide, and drop down the
bay."
"How far had we better go?"
"Wal, I ben a thinkin it all over, an it's my opinion that we'd
better go to St. John next. We may hear of him there, an ef he
don't turn up we can send out some more vessels, an give warnin
that he's astray on the briny biller."
"At what time will we be able to leave?"
"Wal, it'll not be high tide till near one o'clock, but we can git
off ef thar's a wind a leetle before midnight."
"Do you think the wind will hold on?"
The captain raised his head, and looked at the sky; then he looked
out to sea, and then he remained silent for a few minutes.
"Wal," said he, at last, slowly and thoughtfully, "it'll take a man
with a head as long as a hoss to answer that thar. It mought hold
on, an then agin it moughtn't."
"At any rate, I suppose we can drift."
"O, yes; an of the wind doosn't come round too strong, we can git
nigh down pooty close to St. John by mornin."
"We'll run down with the tide."
"Percisely."
"Well, I suppose we'll have to put the time through the best way we
can, and try to be patient. Only it seems hard to be delayed so
much. First there was the fog, which made our search useless; and
now, when there comes a bright day, when we can see where we're
going, here we are tied up in Quaco all day and all night."
"It doos seem hard," said Captain Corbet, gravely, "terrible hard;
an ef I owned a balloon that could rise this here vessel off the
ground, an convey her through the air to her nat'ral element, I'd
hev it done in five minutes, an we'd all proceed to walk the waters
like things of life. But I don't happen to own a balloon, an so
thar you air.
"But, boys," continued the captain, in a solemn voice, elevating
his venerable chin, and regarding them with a patriarchal smile,--
"boys, don't begin to go on in that thar old despondent strain.
Methinks I hear some on you a repinin, an a frettin, cos we're
stuck here hard an fast. Don't do it, boys; take my advice, an
don't do it. Bear in mind the stirrin an memiorable events of this
here mornin. See what a calamity was a threatenin us. Why, I
declare to you all, thar was a time when I expected to see our aged
friend Solomon no more in the flesh. You could not tell it by my
manner, for I presarved a calm an collected dumeanour; but yet, I
tell you, underneath all that icy calm an startlin good-natur of my
attitood, I concealed a heart that bet with dark despair. At that
moment, when we in our wanderins had reached the furthest extremity
that we attained onto, I tell you my blood friz, an my har riz in
horror! Methought it were all up with Solomon; and when I see his
hat, it seemed to me jest as though I was a regardin with despairin
eye his tumestun whereon war graven by no mortial hand the solemn
an despairin epigram, 'Hic jacet!'
"So now, my friends," continued the captain, as he brushed a tear-
drop from his eye, "let us conterrol our feelins. Let us be calm,
and hope for the best. When Solomon took his departoor, an was
among the missin, I thought that an evil fortin was a berroodin
over us, and about to consume us. But that derream air past.
Solomon is onst more among the eatables. He cooks agin the mortial
repast. He lives! So it will be with our young friend who has so
mysteriously drifted away from our midst. Cheer up, I say! Them's
my sentiment. He'll come to, an turn up, all alive--right side up--
with care,--C. O. D.,--O. K.,--to be shaken before taken,--marked
and numbered as per margin,--jest as when shipped, in good order
an condition, on board the schooner Antelope, Corbet master, of
Grand Pre."
These words of Captain Corbet had a very good effect upon the boys.
They had already felt very much cheered by the escape of Solomon,
and it seemed to them to be a good omen. If Solomon had escaped,
so also might Tom. And, as their anxiety on Solomon's account had
all been dispelled by his restoration, so also might they hope that
their anxiety about Tom would be dispelled. True, he had been lost
to them for a much longer time, and his absence was certainly
surrounded by a more terrible obscurity than any which had been
connected with that of Solomon. Yet this one favorable
circumstance served to show them that all might not be so dark as
they had feared. Thus, therefore, they began to be more sanguine,
and to hope that when they reached St. John, some tidings of the
lost boy might be brought to them.
Solomon's exertions towards giving them a dinner were on this day
crowned with greater success than had been experienced for some
days past. Their exertions had given them an appetite, and they
were able to eat heartily for the first time since Tom's departure.
The rest of the day passed very slowly with them. They retired
early, and slept until midnight. At that time they waked, and went
on deck, when they had the extreme satisfaction of seeing the
vessel get under way. A moderate breeze was blowing, which was
favorable, and though the tide was not yet in their favor, yet the
wind was sufficient to bear them out into the bay. Then the boys
all went below again, full of hope. The night passed away quietly,
and without any incident whatever. They all slept soundly, and the
dreams that came to them were pleasant rather than otherwise.
Awaking in the morning by daylight, they all hurried up on deck,
and encountered there a new disappointment; for all around them
they saw again the hated presence of the fog. The wind also had
died away, and the vessel's sails flapped idly against her masts.
"Where are we now?" asked Bruce, in a despondent tone.
"Wal," said Captain Corbet, "as nigh as I can reckon, we're two or
three miles outside of St. John harbor."
"How is the tide?"
"Wal, it's kine o' agin us, jest now."
"There doesn't seem to be any wind."
"Not much."
"Shall we get into St. John to-day?"
"Wal, I kine o' think we'll manage it."
"How soon?"
"Wal, not much afore midday. You see we're driftin away jest now."
"Don't you intend to anchor till the next rise of tide?"
"O, yes; in about ten minutes we'd ought to be about whar I want to
anchor."
At this disheartening condition of affairs the boys sank once more
into a state of gloom. In about ten minutes, as Captain Corbet
said, the schooner was at anchor, and there was nothing to do but
to wait.
"We'll run in at turn o' tide," said he.
Breakfast came, and passed. The meal was eaten in silence. Then
they went on deck again, fretting and chafing at the long delay.
Not much was said, but the boys stood in silence, trying to see
through the thick fog.
"It was so fine when we left," said Bart, "that I thought we'd have
it all the way."
"Wal, so we did--pooty much all; but then, you see, about four this
mornin we run straight into a fog bank."
"Has the wind changed?"
"Wal, thar don't seem jest now to be any wind to speak of, but it
kine o' strikes me that it's somethin like southerly weather.
Hence this here fog."
After a few hours the vessel began to get under way again; and now,
too, there arose a light breeze, which favored them. As they went
on they heard the long, regular blast of a steam whistle, which
howled out a mournful note from time to time. Together with this,
they heard, occasionally, the blasts of fog horns from unseen
schooners in their neighborhood, and several times they could
distinguish the rush of some steamer past them, whose whistle
sounded sharply in their ears.
As they drew nearer, these varied sounds became louder, and at
length the yell of one giant whistle sounded close beside them.
"We're a enterin o' the harbure," said Captain Corbet.
Hours passed away from the time the Antelope raised anchor until
she reached the wharf. In passing up the harbor, the shadowy forms
of vessels at anchor became distinguishable amid the gloom, and in
front of them, as they neared the wharf, there arose a forest of
masts belonging to schooners. It was now midday. Suddenly there
arose a fearful din all around. It was the shriek of a large
number of steam whistles, and seemed to come up from every side.
"Is that for the fog?" asked Bruce.
"O, no," said Bart; "those are the saw-mills whistling for twelve
o'clock."
The boys had already completed their preparations for landing, and
had changed their eccentric clothing for apparel which was more
suited to making their appearance in society. Bart had insisted
that they should go to his house, and wait until they might decide
what to do; and the boys had accepted his hospitable invitation.
They stepped on shore full of hope, not doubting that they would
hear news of Tom. They had persuaded themselves that he had been
picked up by some vessel which was coming down the bay, and had
probably been put ashore here; in which case they knew that he
would at once communicate with Bart's people. They even thought
that Tom would be there to receive them.
"Of course he will be," said Bart; "if he did turn up, they'd make
him stay at the house, you know; and he'd know that we fellows
would come down here in the hope of hearing about him. So we'll
find him there all right, after all. Hurrah!"
But, on reaching his home, Bart's joyous meeting with his family
was very much marred by the deep, dark, and bitter disappointment
that awaited him and his companions.
They knew nothing whatever about Tom. Bart's father was shocked at
the story. He knew that no boy had been picked up adrift in the
bay during the past week. Such an event would have been known. He
felt exceedingly anxious, and at once instituted a search among the
coasting vessels. The search was a thorough one, but resulted in
nothing. There was no one who had seen anything of a drifting
boat. All reported thick fog in the bay.
The result of this search plunged Bart and his friends into their
former gloom.
Other searches were made. Inquiries were sent by telegraph to
different places, but without result.
The fate of the missing boy now became a serious question
As for Bart and his friends, they were inconsolable.
XVIII.
Down the Bay.--Drifting and Anchoring.--In the Dark, morally and
physically.--Eastport, the jumping-off Place.--Grand Manan.--
Wonderful Skill.--Navigating in the Fog.--A Plunge from Darkness
into Light, and from Light into Darkness.
It was Saturday when Bart reached home. As much was done on that
day as possible. Bart was in the extreme of wretchedness, and so
eager was he to resume the search for his friend, that his father
gave his permission for him to start off again in the Antelope.
The other boys also were to go with him. They determined to scour
the seas till they found Tom, or had learned his fate.
Mr. Damer also assured Bart that he would take the matter in hand
himself, and would send out two schooners to go about the bay. In
addition to this, he would telegraph to different places, so that
the most extensive search possible might be instituted. Every part
of the coast should be explored, and even the islands should be
visited.
All this gave as much consolation to Bart and his friends as it was
possible for them to feel under the circumstances.
As much as possible was done on Saturday, but the next day was an
idle one, as far as the search was concerned. Bart and the boys
waited with great impatience, and finally on Monday morning they
left once more in the Antelope. It was about five o'clock in the
morning, the tide was in their favor, and, though there was a head
wind, yet be fore the turn of tide they were anchored a good
distance down the bay.
"My idee is this," said Captain Corbet. "I'll explore the hull bay
in search of that driftin boy. I'll go down this side, cross over,
and come up on t'other. We'll go down here first, an not cross
over till we get as fur as Quoddy Head. I think, while we air down
thar, I'll call at Eastport an ask a few questions. But I must say
it seems a leetle too bad to have the fog go on this way. If this
here had ony happened a fortnight ago, we'd have had clear weather
an fair winds. It's too bad, I declar."
They took advantage of the next tide to go down still farther, and
by twelve o'clock on Monday night they were far down. Since
leaving St. John they had seen nothing whatever, but they had heard
occasionally the fog horns of wandering schooners, and once they
had listened to the yell of a steamer's whistle.
"I've allus said," remarked Captain Corbet, "that in navigatin this
here bay, tides is more important than winds, and anchors is more
important than sails. That's odd to seafarin men that ain't
acquainted with these waters, but it air a oncontrovartible fact.
Most of the distressin casooalties that happen hereabouts occur
from a ignorance of this on the part of navigators. They WILL pile
on sail. Now, in clar weather an open sea, pile it on, I say; but
in waters like these, whar's the use? Why, it's flyin clar in the
face of Providence. Now look at me--do I pile on sail? Not me.
Catch me at it! When I can git along without, why, I git. At the
same time, I don't think you'll find it altogether for the good of
your precious health, boys, to be a movin about here in the fog at
midnight. Better go below. You can't do no good a settin or a
standin up here, squintin through a darkness that might be felt, an
that's as thick as any felt I ever saw. So take my advice, an go
below, and sleep it off."
It was impossible to gainsay the truth of Captain Corbet's remarks,
and as it was really midnight, and the darkness almost as thick as
he said, the boys did go below, and managed to get to sleep in
about a minute and a half after their heads touched the pillows.
Before they were awake on the following day the anchor was hoisted,
and the Antelope was on her way again.
"Here we air, boys," said the captain, as they came on deck, "under
way--the Antelope on her windin way over the mounting wave, a
bereasting of the foamin biller like all possessed. I prophesy for
this day a good time as long as the tide lasts."
"Do you think we'll get to Eastport harbor with this tide?"
"Do I think so?--I know it. I feel it down to my butes. Eastport
harbure? Yea! An arter that we hev all plain-sailin."
"Why, won't the fog last?"
"I don't car for the fog. Arter we get to Eastport harbure we
cease goin down the bay. We then cross over an steal up the other
side. Then it's all our own. If the fog lasts, why, the wind'll
last too, an we can go up flyin, all sails set; an I'll remuve from
my mind, for the time bein, any prejudyce that I have agin wind at
sails."
"Do you intend to go ashore at Eastport?"
"Yes, for a short time--jest to make inquiries. It will be a
consolation, you know."
"Of course."
"Then I'll up sail, an away we'll go, irrewspective of tides,
across the bay."
By midday the captain informed them that they were in Eastport
harbor.
"See thar," said he, as he pointed to a headland with a light-
house. "That thar is the entrance. They do call this a pootyish
place; but as it's this thick, you won't hev much chance to see it.
Don't you want to go ashore an walk about?"
"Not if we can help it. Of course we'll have to ask after poor
Tom, but we haven't any curiosity."
"Wal, p'aps not--ony thar is people that find this a dreadful
cur'ous place. It's got, as I said, a pootyish harbure; but that
ain't the grand attraction. The grand attraction centres in a rock
that's said to be the eastest place in the neighborin republic,--in
short, as they call it, the 'jumpin-off place.' You'd better go an
see it; ony you needn't jump off, unless you like."
Sailing up the harbor, the fog grew light enough for them to see
the shore. The town lay in rather an imposing situation, on the
side of a hill, which was crowned by a fort. A large number of
vessels lay about at the wharves and at anchor. Here they went
ashore in a boat, but on making inquiries could gain no information
about Tom; nor could they learn anything which gave them the
slightest encouragement.
"We've got to wait here a while so as to devarsefy the time.
Suppose we go an jump off?" said the captain.
The boys assented to this in a melancholy manner, and the captain
led the way through the town, till at last he halted at the extreme
east end.
"Here," said he, "you behold the last extremity of a great an
mighty nation, that spreads from the Atlantic to the Pacific, an
from the Gulf of Mexiky to the very identical spot that you air now
a occypyin of. It air a celebrated spot, an this here air a
memorable momient in your youthful lives, if you did but know it!"
There was nothing very striking about this place, except the fact
which Captain Corbet had stated. Its appearance was not very
imposing, yet, on the other hand, it was not without a certain wild
beauty. Before them spread the waters of the bay, with islands
half concealed in mist; while immediately in front, a steep, rocky
bank went sheer down for some thirty or forty feet to the beach
below.
"I suppose," said the captain, "that bein Pilgrims, it air our
dooty to jump; but as it looks a leetle rocky down thar, I think
we'd best defer that to another opportoonity."
Returning to the schooner, they weighed anchor, set sail, and left
the harbor. On leaving it, they did not go back the way they had
come, but passed through a narrow and very picturesque channel,
which led them by a much shorter route into the bay. On their left
were wooded hills, and on their right a little village on the slope
of a hill, upon whose crest stood a church.
Outside the fog lay as thick as ever, and into this they plunged.
Soon the monotonous gray veil of mist closed all around them. But
now their progress was more satisfactory, for they were crossing
the bay, and the wind was abeam.
"Are you going straight across to Nova Scotia now?" asked Bart.
"Wal, yes; kine o' straight across," was the reply; "ony on our
way we've got to call at a certain place, an contenoo our
investergations."
"What place is that?"
"It's the Island of Grand Manan--a place that I allers feel the
greatest respect for. On that thar island is that celebrated fog
mill that I told you of, whar they keep grindin night an day, in
southerly weather, so as to keep up the supply of fog for old
Fundy. Whatever we'd do without Grand Manan is more'n I can say."
"Is the island inhabited?" asked Bruce.
"Inhabited? O, dear, yas. Thar's a heap o' people thar. It's
jest possible that a driftin boat might git ashore thar, an ef so
we'll know pooty soon."
"How far is it?"
"O, ony about seven or eight mile."
"We'll be there in an hour or so, then?"
"Wal, not so soon. You see, we've got to go round it."
"Around it?"
"Yes"
"Why?"
"Cos thar ain't any poppylation on this side, an we've got to land
on t'other."
"Why are there no people on this side?"
"Cos thar ain't no harbures. The cliffs air six hundred feet high,
and the hull shore runs straight on for ever so fur without a
break, except two triflin coves."
"How is it on the other side?"
"Wal, the east side ain't a bad place. The shore is easier, an
thar's harbures an anchorages. Thar's a place they call Whale
Cove, whar I'm goin to land, an see if I can hear anythin. The
people air ony fishers, an they ain't got much cultivation; but
it's mor'en likely that a driftin boat might touch thar somewhar."
The Antelope pursued her course, but it was as much as three hours
before she reached her destination. They dropped anchor then, and
landed. The boys had already learned not to indulge too readily in
hope; but when they made their inquiries, and found the same answer
meeting them here which they had received in other places, they
could not avoid feeling a fresh pang of disappointment and
discouragement.
"Wal, we didn't git much good out of this place," said Captain
Corbet. "I'm sorry that we have sech a arrand as ourn. Ef it
warn't for that we could spend to-night here, an to-morry I'd take
you all to see the fog mill; but, as it is, I rayther think I won't
linger here, but perceed on our way."
"Where do we go next--to Nova Scotia?"
"Wal, not jest straight across, but kine o' slantin. We head now
for Digby; that's about straight opposite to St. John, an it's as
likely a place as any to make inquiries at."
"How long will it be before we get there?"
"Wal, some time to-morry mornin. To-night we've got nothin at all
to do but to sweep through the deep while the stormy tempests blow
in the shape of a mild sou-wester; so don't you begin your usual
game of settin up. You ain't a mite of good to me, nor to
yourselves, a stayin here. You'd ought all to be abed, and, ef
you'll take my advice, you'll go to sleep as soon as you can, an
stay asleep as long as you can. It'll be a foggy night, an we
won't see a mite o' sunshine till we git into Digby harbure. See
now, it's already dark; so take my advice, an go to bed, like
civilized humane beings."
It did not need much persuasion to send them off to their beds.
Night was coming on, another night of fog and thick darkness. This
time, however, they had the consolation of making some progress, if
it were any consolation when they had no definite course before
them; for, in such a cruise as this, when they were roaming about
from one place to another, without any fixed course, or fixed
time, the progress that they made was, after all, a secondary
consideration. The matter of first importance was to hear news of
Tom, and, until they did hear something, all other things were of
little moment.
The Antelope continued on her way all that night, and on the next
morning the boys found the weather unchanged. Breakfast passed,
and two or three hours went on. The boys were scattered about the
decks, in a languid way, looking out over the water, when suddenly
a cry from Pat, who was in the bows, aroused all of them.
Immediately before them rose a lofty shore, covered in the distance
with dark trees, but terminating at the water's edge in frowning
rocks. A light-house stood here, upon which they had come so
suddenly that, before they were over their first surprise, they
were almost near enough to toss a biscuit ashore.
"Wal, now, I call that thar pooty slick sailin," exclaimed Captain
Corbet, glancing at the lighthouse with sparkling eyes. "I tell
you what it is, boys, you don't find many men in this here day an
age that can leave Manan at dusk, when the old fog mill is hard at
work, and travel all night in the thickest fog ever seen, with tide
agin him half the time, an steer through that thar fog, an agin
that thar tide, so as to hit the light-house as slick as that.
Talk about your scientific navigation--wouldn't I like to see what
one of them thar scientific captings would do with his vessel last
night on sech a track as I run over! Wouldn't I like to run a race
with him? an ef I did, wouldn't I make a pile to leave and bequeath
to the infant when his aged parient air buried beneath the cold
ground?"
While Captain Corbet was speaking, the schooner sailed past the
light-house, and the thick fog closed around her once more. On one
side, however, they could see the dim outline of the shore on their
right. On they sailed for about a quarter of a mile, when suddenly
the fog vanished, and, with scarce a moment's notice, there burst
upon them a blaze of sunlight, while overhead appeared the glory of
the blue sky. The suddenness of that transition forced a cry of
astonishment from all. They had shot forth so quickly from the fog
into the sunlight that it seemed like magic.
They found themselves sailing along a strait about a mile in width,
with shores on each side that were as high as Blomidon. On the
right the heights sloped up steep, and were covered with trees of
rich dark verdure, while on the other side the slope was bolder and
wilder. Houses appeared upon the shore, and roads, and cultivated
trees. This strait was several miles in length, and led into a
broad and magnificent basin.
Here, in this basin, appeared an enchanting view. A sheet of water
extended before their eyes about sixteen miles in length and five
in breadth. All around were lofty shores, fertile, well tilled,
covered with verdurous trees and luxuriant vegetation. The green
of the shores was dotted with white houses, while the blue of the
water was flecked with snowy sails. Immediately on the right there
appeared a circular sweep of shore, on which arose a village whose
houses were intermingled with green trees.
Into this beautiful basin came the old French navigators more than
two centuries ago, and at its head they found a place which seemed
to them the best spot in Acadie to become the capital of the new
colony which they were going to found here. So they established
their little town, and these placid waters became the scene of
commercial activity and of warlike enterprise, till generations
passed away, and the little French town of Port Royal, after many
strange vicissitudes, with its wonderful basin, remained in the
possession of the English conqueror.
"Now," said Captain Corbet, "boys, look round on that thar, an tell
me of you ever see a beautifuller place than this. Thar's ony one
place that can be compared with this here, an that's Grand Pre.
But for the life o' me, I never can tell which o' the two is the
pootiest. It's strange, too, how them French fellers managed to
pick out the best places in the hull province. But it shows their
taste an judgment--it doos, railly."
It was not long before the Antelope had dropped anchor in front of
the town of Digby, and Captain Corbet landed with the boys as soon
as possible. There was as good a chance of Tom being heard of here
as anywhere; since this place lay down the bay, in one sense, and
if by any chance Tom had drifted over to the Nova Scotia shore, as
now seemed probable, he would be not unlikely to go to Digby, so as
to resume his journey, so rudely interrupted, and make his way
thence to his friends.
Digby is a quiet little place, that was finished long ago. It was
first settled by the Tory refugees, who came here after the
revolutionary war, and received land grants from the British
government. At first it had some activity, but its business soon
languished. The first settlers had such bright hopes of its future
that they regularly laid out a town, with streets and squares. But
these have never been used to any extent, and now appear grown over
with grass. Digby, however, has so much beauty of scenery around
it, that it may yet attract a large population. On landing here,
Captain Corbet pursued the same course as at other places. He went
first to one of the principal shops, or the post office, and told
his story, and afterwards went to the schooners at the wharves.
But at Digby there was precisely the same result to their inquiries
as there had been at other places. No news had come to the place
of any one adrift, nor had any skipper of any schooner noticed
anything of the kind during his last trip.
"What had we better do next?"
"Wal," said Captain Corbet, "we can ony finish our cruise."
"Shall we go on?"
"Yes."
"Up the bay?"
"Yes. I'll keep on past Ile Haute, an I'll cruise around Minas.
You see these drifts may take him in a'most any direction. I don't
see why he shouldn't hev drifted up thar as well as down here."
It was Wednesday when they reached Digby.
On the evening of that day the Antelope weighed anchor, and sailed
out into the Bay of Fundy.
It was bright sunshine, with a perfectly cloudless sky inside, but
outside the Antelope plunged into the midst of a dense and heavy
fog.
XIX.
Tom's Devices.--Rising superior to Circumstances.--Roast Clams.--
Baked Lobster.--Boiled Mussels.--Boiled Shrimps.--Roast Eggs.--
Dandelions.--Ditto, with Eggs.--Roast Dulse.--Strawberries.--Pilot-
bread.--Strawberry Cordial.
Meanwhile another day had passed away on Ile Haute.
When we last saw Tom he had succeeded in finding some clams, which
he roasted in front of his fire, and made thus a very acceptable
relish. This not only gratified his palate for the time, but it
also stimulated him to fresh exertions, since it showed him that
his resources were much more extensive than he had supposed them to
be. If he had ever dreaded getting out of all his provisions, he
saw now that the fear was an unfounded one. Here, before his eyes,
and close beside his dwelling-place, there extended a broad field
full of food. In that mud flat there were clams enough to feed him
for all the rest of his life, if that were necessary. But what was
more, he saw by this the possibility that other articles of food
might be reckoned on, by means of which he would be able to relieve
his diet from that monotony which had thus far been its chief
characteristic. If he could find something else besides clams and
biscuit, the tedium of his existence here would be alleviated to a
still greater degree.
He spent some time in considering this subject, and in thinking
over all the possible kinds of food which he might hope to obtain.
Sea and land might both be relied on to furnish food for his table
in the desert. The sea, he knew, ought to supply the following:--
1. Clams,
2. Lobsters,
3. Mussels,
in addition to other things which he had in his mind. The land, on
the other hand, ought to furnish something. Now that his attention
was fairly directed to this important subject, he could think of
several things which would be likely to be found even on this
island, and the search for which would afford an agreeable
amusement.
The more he thought of all this, the more astonished he was at the
number of things which he could think of as being likely to exist
here around him. It was not so much for the sake of gratifying his
appetite, as to find some occupation, that he now entered eagerly
upon putting this new project into execution. Fish, flesh, and
fowl now offered themselves to his endeavors, and these were to be
supplied by land, sea, and sky. This sudden enlargement of his
resources, and also of his sphere of operations, caused him to feel
additional satisfaction, together with a natural self-complacency.
To the ordinary mind Ile Haute appeared utterly deserted and
forlorn--a place where one might starve to death, if he had to
remain for any length of time; but Tom now determined to test to
the utmost the actual resources of the island, so as to prove, to
himself what one unaided boy could do, when thus thrown upon his
own intelligent efforts, with dire necessity to act as a stimulus
to his ingenuity.
First of all, then, there was his box of biscuit, which he had
brought with him.
To this must be added his first discovery on the island, namely,
the clams. Nothing could be of greater importance than this, since
it afforded not merely a relish, but also actual food.
The next thing that he sought after was lobsters, and he went off
in search of these as soon as he could on the following day.
He waited till the tide was low, which was at about twelve o'clock,
and then went down along the beach. At high tide, the water came
close up to the foot of the lofty cliff; but at ebb, it descended
for some distance, so that there was some sort of a beach even in
places that did not promise any.
The beach nearest to where Tom had taken up his abode was an
expanse of mud and sand; but passing along beyond this, on the
north side, it became gravelly. About a hundred yards to the west,
on this side of the island, he came to the place where he had tied
his boat, on that eventful time when he had drifted here. Below
this, the beach extended down for a long distance, and at the
lowest point there were rocks, and sharp stones, and pebbles of
every size. Here Tom began his search, and before he had looked
five minutes, he found several lobsters of good size. A little
farther search showed him that there was a large supply of these,
so that, in fact, sufficient support might have been obtained for a
whole ship's company. By the time that he had found a half dozen
of these, and had brought them back to his hearth-stone, it had
grown too dark to search for any more. Tom's search, however, had
been so successful, that he felt quite satisfied; and though the
day had passed without any change in the weather or any lifting of
the fog, though he had listened in vain for any sound over the
waters which might tell of passers by, though his signal had not
been seen, and his bright burning fire had not been noticed, yet
the occupation of thought and of action which he had found for
himself, had been sufficient to make the time pass not unpleasantly.
His evening repast was now a decided improvement on that of the
preceding day. First of all, he spread some clams in the hot ashes
to roast; and then, taking the dipper which had been used for
baling, he filled it with water, and placing this on the fire, it
soon began to boil. Into this he thrust the smallest lobster, and
watched it as the water bubbled around it, and its scaly covering
turned slowly from its original dark hue to a bright red color.
His success thus far stimulated him to make some attempts at actual
cookery. Removing some of the lobster from its shell, he poured
out most of the water from the pan, and into what remained he again
put the lobster, cutting it up as fine as he could with his knife.
Into this he crumbled some biscuit, and stirred it up all together.
He then placed it over the fire till it was well baked. On
removing it and tasting it, he found it most palatable. It was
already sufficiently salt, and only needed a little pepper to make
it quite equal to any scolloped lobster that he had ever tasted.
His repast consisted of this, followed by the roast clams, which
formed an agreeable variety.
Tom now felt like a giant refreshed; and while sitting in front of
the evening fire, he occupied his mind with plans for the morrow,
which were all directed towards enlarging his supply of provisions.
He awaked late on the next morning, and found the weather
unchanged. He tried to quell his impatience and disappointment,
and feeling that idleness would never do, he determined to go to
work at once, and carry out the plans of the preceding day. It was
now Thursday, the middle of the second week, and the fog had clung
pertinaciously around him almost all that time. It was indeed
disheartening, and idleness under such circumstances would have
ended in misery and despair; but Tom's perseverance, and obstinate
courage, and buoyant spirits enabled him still to rise above
circumstances, and struggle with the gloom around him.
"O, go on, go on," he muttered, looking around upon the fog.
"Let's see who can stand it longest. And now for my foraging
expedition."
Making a hearty repast out of the remnants of the supper of the
preceding evening, he went first to the shore, so as to complete
his search there while the tide should be low. It was going down
now, and the beach was all before him. He wandered on till he came
to where there was an immense ledge of sharp rocks, that went from
the foot of the precipice down into the bay. Over these he
clambered, looking carefully around, until at last he reached the
very lowest point. Here he soon found some articles of diet, which
were quite as valuable in their way as the clams and lobsters.
First of all, he found an immense quantity of large mussels. These
were entangled among the thick masses of sea-weed. He knew that
the flavor of mussels was much more delicate than that of clams or
lobsters, and that by many connoisseurs these, when good and fresh,
were ranked next to oysters. This discovery, therefore, gave him
great joy, and he filled his pan, which he had carried down, and
took them back to the shore. He also took an armful of sea-weed,
and, reaching his camping-place, he threw the mussels in a hollow
place in the sand, placing the sea-weed around them. In this way
he knew that they would keep fresh and sweet for any reasonable
length of time.
Returning to the ledges of rock, he walked about among them, and
found a number of pools, some of which were of considerable size.
These had been left by the retreating water; and in these hollows
he soon saw a number of small objects moving about. Some of them
he caught without much difficulty, and saw that they were shrimps.
He had hoped to find some of these, but the discovery came to him
like some unexpected pleasure, and seemed more than he had any
right to count on. Beside the shrimps his other discoveries seemed
inferior. There was a large number, and they could be caught
without much trouble. He soon filled his pan, and brought these
also to his camping-place. These he deposited in a little pool,
which was on the surface of some rocks that lay not far from the
shore. Over these he also laid some sea-weed.
The tide was now coming up, but Tom made a further journey to the
beach, so as to secure something which he had noticed during his
previous expedition. This was a marine plant called dulse, which,
in these waters, grows very plentifully, and is gathered and dried
by the people in large quantities. It was a substance of which Tom
was very fond, and he determined to gather some, and dry it in the
sun. Collecting an armful of this, he took it to the shore, and
spread it out over the grass, though, in that damp and foggy
atmosphere, there was not much prospect of its drying.
It was now about three o'clock in the afternoon, and Tom's
researches along the shore were successfully terminated. He had
found all the different articles that he had thought of and his new
acquisitions were now lying about him.
These were,--
Clams,
Lobsters,
Mussels,
Shrimps,
Dulse.
As he murmured to himself the list of things, he smiled triumphantly.
But still there was work to be done. Tom intended to keep
fashionable hours, and dine late, with only a lunch in the middle
of the day. His explorations of the afternoon were to be
important, and he hoped that they would be crowned with a portion
of that success which had attended the work of the morning. He
took, therefore, a hasty lunch of biscuit and cold lobster, washed
down with water, and then set forth.
This time he turned away from the shore, and went to the top of the
island. He carried in his hand a bit of rope, about a dozen feet
in length, and went along the edge of the cliff as far as he could,
turning aside at times to avoid any clumps of trees or bushes that
grew too thickly. In front of him the line of cliff extended for
some distance, and he walked along, until, at last, he came to a
place where the gulls flew about in larger flocks than usual,
almost on a line with the top of the rock. He had not noticed them
particularly on his former walk along here; but now he watched them
very attentively, and finally stood still, so as to see their
actions to better advantage.
Tom, in fact, had made up his mind to procure some gulls' eggs,
thinking that these would make an addition to his repast of great
importance; and he now watched the motions of these birds, so as to
detect the most accessible of their nests. He did not have to
watch long. A little observation showed him a place, just under
the cliff, not far away from him. Hastening forward, he bent over,
and, looking down, he saw a large number of nests. They had been
constructed on a shelf of rock immediately below the edge of the
cliff, and the eggs were within easy reach. The gulls flew about
wildly, as the intruder reached down his hands towards their nests,
and screamed and shrieked, while some of them rushed towards him,
within a few feet of his head, as though they would assail him and
beat him off. But Tom's determination did not falter. He cared no
more for the gulls than if they were so many pigeons, but secured
as many eggs as he could carry. These he took with him back to his
camp.
But he was not yet satisfied. He was anxious to have some
vegetables; and over the open ground, among the grass, he had seen
plants which were very familiar to him. There were dandelions; and
Tom saw in them something that seemed worth more than any of his
other acquisitions. Going forth in search of these, he managed to
get his pan full of them. These he washed, and after cutting off
the roots, he put them in the pan with water, and then set them
over the fire to boil.
While they were boiling Tom went off once more, and found some wild
strawberries. They were quite plentiful about here, and this was
the season for them. He stripped a piece of bark from a birch
tree, as the country people do, and formed from this a dish which
would hold about a quart. This he filled after a moderate search.
He took the strawberries to his camp, and then, going back to the
woods, he procured some more birch bark, out of which he made a
half dozen dishes. It was now about five o'clock, and Tom thought
it was time for him to begin to cook his dinner.
The dandelions were not quite cooked as yet; so Tom had to wait;
but while doing so, he heated some stones in the fire. By the time
they were heated, the dandelions were cooked; and Tom, removing the
pan, put some shrimps and mussels in it, to boil over the fire. He
then removed the stones, and placed one of the lobsters among them
in such a way, that it was surrounded on every side in a hot oven.
He then buried a few clams among the hot ashes, and did the same
with three or four of the gulls' eggs.
One of the hot stones was reserved for another purpose. It was the
largest of them, and was red hot when he drew it from the fire, but
soon cooled down enough to resume its natural color, although it
retained an intense heat.
Over this he spread some of the wet dulse, which soon crackled and
shrivelled up, sending forth a rich and fragrant steam. In
roasting this dulse, a large piece would shrink to very small
proportions, so that half of Tom's armful, when thus roasted, was
reduced to but a small handful.
After finishing this, he drew the gulls' eggs from the fire, and
taking off the shells, he cut them in slices, and put them with the
dandelions. Then he took the shrimps and mussels from the fire,
and removing them from the pan, he separated them, and put them
into different bark dishes. The clams were next drawn forth, and
though rather overdone, they were, nevertheless, of tempting
appearance and appetizing odor. Finally, the lobster was removed,
and Tom contented himself with one of the claws, which he placed on
a dish, reserving the remainder for another time.
And now the articles were all cooked, and Tom's repast was ready.
He looked with a smile of gratification upon the various dishes
which his ingenuity and industry had drawn forth from the rocks,
and cliffs, and mud, and sand of a desert island, and wondered
whether other islands, in tropical climates, could yield a more
varied or more nutritious supply. He thought of other plants which
might be found here, and determined to try some that seemed to be
nutritious.
Here is the repast which Tom, on that occasion, spread before
himself:--
1. Roast clams,
2. Baked lobster,
3. Boiled mussels,
4. Boiled shrimps,
5. Roast eggs,
6. Dandelions,
7. Dandelions with eggs,
8. Roast dulse,
9. Strawberries,
10. Pilot-bread.
In one thing only did Tom fall short of his wishes, and that was in
the way of drinks. But before that dinner was finished, even this
was remedied; for necessity, the great mother of invention,
instigated Tom to squeeze about half of his strawberries into a
little water. Out of this he formed a drink with a flavor that
seemed to him to be quite delicious. And that made what Tom
called,--
11. Strawberry cordial.
XX.
New Discoveries.--The Boat.--A great Swell.--Meditations and
Plans.--A new, and wonderful, and before unheard-of Application of
Spruce Gum.--I'm afloat! I'm afloat!
Tom sat there over his banquet until late. He then went down to
the beach, and brought up a vast collection of driftwood, and
throwing a plenteous supply upon the fire, he lay down beside it,
and looked out over the water, trying, as usual, to see something
through the thick mist. The flames shot up with a crackle and a
great blaze, and the bright light shone brilliantly upon the water.
The tide was now up, and the boat was full before him. Tom fixed
his eyes upon this boat, and was mournfully recalling his
unsuccessful experiment at making her sea-worthy, and was waiting
to see her sink down to her gunwales as she filled, when the
thought occurred to him that she was not filling so rapidly as she
might, but was floating much better than usual. A steady
observation served to show him that this was no fancy, but an
actual fact; and the confirmation of this first impression at once
drove away all other thoughts, and brought back all the ideas of
escape which he once had cherished.
The boat was admitting the water, certainly, yet she certainly did
not leak quite so badly as before, but was floating far better than
she had done on the night of his trial. What was the meaning of
this?
Now, the fact is, he had not noticed the boat particularly during
the last few days. He had given it up so completely, that it
ceased to have any interest in his eyes. Raising his signal,
building his house, and exploring the island had taken up all his
thoughts. Latterly he had thought of nothing but his dinner. But
now the change in the boat was unmistakable, and it seemed to him
that the change might have been going on gradually all this time
without his noticing it until it had become so marked.
What was the cause of this change? That was the question which he
now sought to answer. After some thought he found a satisfactory
explanation.
For a number of days the boat had been admitting the water till she
was full. This water had remained in for an hour or more, and this
process of filling and emptying had been repeated every tide. The
atmosphere also had been wet, and the wood, thus saturated with
water so frequently, had no chance of getting dry. Tom thought,
therefore, that the wooden framework, which he had constructed so
as to tighten the leak, had been gradually swelling from the action
of the water; and the planks of the boat had been tightening their
cracks from the same cause, so that now the opening was not nearly
so bad as it had been. Thus the boat, which once had been able to
float him for a quarter of an hour or more, ought now to be able to
float him for at least double that time.
Tom watched the boat very attentively while the tide was up; and,
when at length it began to retreat, and leave it once more aground,
he noticed that it was not more than half full of water. If any
confirmation had been needed to the conclusions which he had drawn
from seeing the improved buoyancy of the boat, it would have been
afforded by this. Tom accepted this with delight, as an additional
circumstance in his favor; and now, having become convinced of this
much, he set his wits to work to see if some plan could not be hit
upon by means of which the boat could once more be made sea-worthy.
Tom's indefatigable perseverance must have been noticed by this
time. To make the best of circumstances; to stand face to face
with misfortune, and shrink not; to meet the worst with equanimity,
and grasp eagerly at the slightest favorable change,--such was the
character that Tom had shown during his experience of the past.
Now, once more, he grasped at this slight circumstance that
appeared to favor his hopes, and sought to find some way by which
that half-floating boat could be made to float wholly, and bear him
away to those shores that were so near by. Too long had he been
submitting to this imprisonment; too long had he been waiting for
schooners to pass and to bring him help; too long had he been shut
in by a fog that seemed destined never to lift so long as he was
here. If he could only form some kind of a boat that would float
long enough to land him on the nearest coast, all that he wished
would be gratified.
As he thought over this subject, he saw plainly what he had felt
very strongly before--that the boat could not be sea-worthy unless
he had some tar with which to plaster over the broken bow, and fill
in the gaping seams; but there was no tar. Still, did it follow
that there was nothing else? Might not something be found upon the
island which would serve the purpose of tar? There must be some
such substance and perhaps it might be found here.
Tom now thought over all the substances that he could bring before
his mind. Would clay do? No; clay would not. Would putty? No,
and besides, he could not get any. What, then, would serve this
important purpose?
Tar was produced from trees. Were there no trees here that
produced some sticky and glutinous substance like tar? There was
the resin of pine trees, but there were no pines on the island.
What then? These fir trees had a sort of sticky, balsamic juice
that exuded plentifully from them wherever they were cut. Might he
not make some use of that? Suddenly, in the midst of reflections
like these, he thought of the gum that is found on spruce trees--
spruce gum! It was an idea that deserved to be followed up and
carried out. Thus far he had never thought of spruce gum, except
as something which he, like most boys, was fond of chewing; but now
it appeared before his mind as affording a possible solution of his
difficulty. The more he thought of it, the more did it seem that
this would be adapted to his purpose. The only question was,
whether he could obtain enough of it. He thought that he might
easily obtain enough if he only took the proper time and care.
With this new plan in his mind, Tom retired for the night, and
awaked the next morning by the dawn of day. It was still foggy;
but he was now so resigned, and was so full of his new plan, that
it did not trouble him in the slightest degree. In fact, he was so
anxious to try this, that the sight of a boat landing on the beach,
all ready to take him off, would not have afforded him an unmixed
satisfaction.
He took his tin dipper, and went up at once into the woods. Here
he looked around very carefully, and soon found what he wanted. He
knew perfectly well, of course, how to distinguish spruce trees
from fir, by the sharp, prickly spires of the former, and so he was
never at a loss which trees to search. No sooner had he begun,
than he was surprised at the quantities that he found. To an
ordinary observer the trunk of the spruce tree seems like any other
tree trunk--no rougher, and perhaps somewhat smoother than many;
but Tom now found that on every tree almost there were little round
excrescences, which, on being picked at with the knife, came off
readily, and proved to be gum. Vast quantities of a substance
which goes by the name of spruce gum are manufactured and sold; but
the pure gum is a very different article, having a rich, balsamic
odor, and a delicate yet delicious flavor; and Tom, as he filled
his pan, and inhaled the fragrance that was emitted by its
contents, lamented that his necessities compelled him to use it for
such a purpose as that to which this was destined. After four or
five hours' work, he found that he had gathered enough. He had
filled his pan no less than six times, and had secured a supply
which was amply sufficient to give a coating of thick gum over all
the fractured place. The tide, which had already risen, was now
falling, and, as soon as the boat was aground, and the water out of
her, Tom proceeded to raise her bows, in precisely the same manner
as he had raised the boat on a former occasion.
The next thing was to bring the gum into a fit condition for use.
This he did by kindling the fire, and melting it in his tin pan.
This would rather interfere with the use of that article as a
cooking utensil, but now that Tom's mind was full of this new
purpose, cooking and things of that sort had lost all attractions
for him. As for food, there was no fear about that. He had his
biscuit, and the lobster and shell-fish which he had cooked on the
preceding day were but partially consumed. Enough remained to
supply many more meals.
The gum soon melted, and then a brush was needed to apply it to the
boat. This was procured by cutting off a little strip of canvas,
about a yard long and six inches wide. By picking out some of the
threads, and rolling it up, a very serviceable brush was formed.
Taking the gum now in its melted state, Tom dipped his brush into
it, and applied it all over the broken surface of the bow, pressing
the hot liquid in close, and allowing it to harden in the cracks.
His first coating of gum was very satisfactorily applied, and it
seemed as though a few more coatings ought to secure the boat from
the entrance of the water. The gum was tenacious, and its only bad
quality was its brittleness; but, as it would not be exposed to the
blows of any hard substances, it seemed quite able to serve Tom's
wants.
Tom now went down to the drift-wood and brought up a fresh supply
of fuel, after which he melted a second panful of gum, and applied
this to the boat. He endeavored to secure an entrance for it into
all the cracks that did not seem to be sufficiently filled at the
first application, and now had the satisfaction of seeing all of
those deep marks filled up and effaced by the gum.
One place still remained which had not yet been made secure against
the entrance of the water, and that was where the planks gaped open
from the blow that had crushed in the bows. Here the canvas that
was inside protruded slightly. Torn ripped up some of the canvas
that was on the tent, and taking the threads, stuffed them in the
opening, mixing them with gum as he did so, until it was filled;
and then over this he put a coating of the gum. After this another
pan, and yet another, were melted, and the hot gum each time was
applied. This gave the whole surface a smooth appearance, that
promised to be impenetrable to the water.
The gum which he had collected was enough to fill two more pans.
This he melted as before, and applied to the bows. Each new
application clung to the one that had preceded it, in a thick and
quickly hardening layer, until at last, when the work was done,
there appeared a coating of this gum formed from six successive
layers, that was smooth, and hard, and without any crack whatever.
It seemed absolutely water-tight; and Tom, as he looked at it now,
could not imagine where the water could penetrate. Yet, in order
to make assurance doubly sure, he collected two more panfuls, and
melting this he applied it as before. After this was over, he made
a torch of birch bark, and lighting this, he held the flame against
the gum till the whole outer surface began to melt and run
together. This served to secure any crevices that his brush might
have passed by without properly filling.
The work was now complete as far as Tom could do it; and on
examining it, he regretted that he had not thought of this before.
He felt an exultation that he had never known in his life. If he,
by his own efforts, could thus rescue himself, what a cause it
would be always after to struggle against misfortune, and rise
superior to circumstances!
As to the voyage, Tom's plan was the same that it had been on a
former occasion. He would float the boat at high tide, and then
push off, keeping her near the shore, yet afloat until ebb tide.
Then, when the tide should turn, and the current run up the bay, he
would put off, and float along with the stream until he reached
land.
According to his calculations it would be high tide about two hours
after dark, which would be some time after ten. He would have to
be up all night; for the tide would not turn until after four in
the morning. But that did not trouble him. He would have too much
on his mind to allow him to feel sleepy, and, besides, the hope
which lay before him would prevent him from feeling fatigue.
One thing more remained, and that was, to bring up a fresh supply
of fuel. The night would be dark, and while floating in the boat,
he would need the light of the fire. So he brought up from the
beach an ample supply of drift-wood, and laid it with the rest.
When Tom's work was ended, it was late in the day, and he
determined to secure some sleep before he began his long night's
work. He knew that he could waken at the right time; so he laid
himself down in his tent, and soon slept the sleep of the weary.
By ten o'clock he was awake. He found the water already up to the
boat. There was no time to lose. He carried his box of biscuit on
board, and filled his pan with water from the brook, so as to
secure himself against thirst in case the boat should float away
farther than he anticipated. Then he took his paddle, and got into
the boat.
The water came up higher. Most anxiously Tom watched it as it
rose. The fire was burning low, and in order to make more light,
Tom went ashore and heaped an immense quantity of wood upon it.
The flames now blazed up bright, and on going back again to the
boat, the water was plainly visible as it closed around the bows.
Most anxiously he now awaited, with his eyes fastened upon the
bottom of the boat. He had not brought the old sail this time, but
left it over his tent, and he could see plainly. Higher came the
water, and still higher, yet none came into the boat, and Tom could
scarce believe in his good fortune.
At last the boat floated!
Yes, the crisis had come and passed, and the boat floated!
There was now no longer any doubt. His work was successful; his
deliverance was sure. The way over the waters was open. Farewell
to his island prison! Welcome once more the great world! Welcome
home, and friends, and happiness!
In that moment of joy his heart seemed almost ready to burst. It
was with difficulty that he calmed himself; and then, offering up a
prayer of thanksgiving, he pushed off from the shore.
The boat floated!
The tide rose, and lingered, and fell.
The boat floated still.
There was not the slightest sign of a leak. Every hour, as it
passed, served to give Tom a greater assurance that the boat was
sea-worthy.
He found no difficulty in keeping her afloat, even while retaining
her near the shore, so that she might be out of the way of the
currents.
At length, when the tide was about half way down, he found the fire
burning too low, and determined to go ashore and replenish it. A
rock jutted above the water not far off. To this he secured the
boat, and then landing, he walked up the beach. Reaching the fire,
he threw upon it all the remaining wood. Returning then to the
boat, he boarded her without difficulty.
The tide fell lower and lower.
And now Tom found it more and more difficult to keep the boat
afloat, without allowing her to be caught by the current. He did
not dare to keep her bows near the shore, but turned her about, so
that her stem should rest from time to time on the gravel. At last
the tide was so low that rocks appeared above the surface, and the
boat occasionally struck them in a very unpleasant manner. To stay
so near the shore any longer was not possible. A slight blow
against a rock might rub off all the brittle gum, and then his
chances would be destroyed. He determined to put out farther, and
trust himself to Providence.
Slowly and cautiously he let his boat move out into deeper water.
But slowness and caution were of little avail. In the deeper water
there was a strong current, which at once caught the boat and bore
her along. Tom struggled bravely against it, but without avail.
He thought for a moment of seeking the shore again, but the fear
that the boat would be ruined deterred him.
There was a little wind blowing from the southwest, and he
determined to trust to the sail. He loosened this, and, sitting
down, waited for further developments.
The wind filled the sail, and the boat's progress was checked
somewhat, yet still she drifted down the bay.
She was drifting down past the north shore of the island. Tom
could see, amid the gloom, the frowning cliffs as he drifted past.
The firelight was lost to view; then he looked for some time upon
the dark form of the island.
At last even that was lost to view.
He was drifting down the bay, and was already below Ile Haute.
XXI.
Scott's Bay and Old Bennie.--His two Theories.--Off to the desert
Island.--Landing.--A Picnic Ground.--Gloom and Despair of the
Explorers.--All over.--Sudden Summons.
It was on Wednesday evening that the Antelope passed from the
sunshine and beauty of Digby Basin out into the fog and darkness of
the Bay of Fundy. The tide was falling, and, though the wind was
in their favor, yet their progress was somewhat slow. But the fact
that they were moving was of itself a consolation. In spite of
Captain Corbet's declared preference for tides and anchors, and
professed contempt for wind and sails, the boys looked upon these
last as of chief importance, and preferred a slow progress with the
wind to even a more rapid one by means of so unsatisfactory a
method of travel as drifting.
At about nine on the following morning, the Antelope reached a
little place called Wilmot Landing, where they went on shore and
made the usual inquiries with the usual result. Embarking again,
they sailed on for the remainder of that day, and stopped at one or
two places along the coast.
On the next morning (Friday) they dropped anchor in front of Hall's
Harbor--a little place whose name had become familiar to them
during their memorable excursion to Blomidon. Here they met with
the same discouraging answer to their question.
"Wal," said Captain Corbet, "we don't seem to meet with much
success to speak of--do we?"
"No," said Bart, gloomily.
"I suppose your pa'll be sendin schooners over this here same
ground. 'Tain't no use, though."
"Where shall we go next?"
"Wal, we've ben over the hull bay mostly; but thar's one place,
yet, an that we'll go to next."
"What place is that?"
"Scott's Bay.
"My idee is this," continued Captain Corbet: "We'll finish our
tower of inspection round the Bay of Fundy at Scott's Bay. Thar
won't be nothin more to do; thar won't remain one single settlement
but what we've called at, 'cept one or two triflin places of no
'count. So, after Scott's Bay, my idee is to go right straight off
to old Minas. Who knows but what he's got on thar somewhar?"
"I don't see much chance of that."
"Why not?"
"Because, if he had drifted into the Straits of Minas, he'd manage
to get ashore."
"I don't see that."
"Why, it's so narrow."
"Narrer? O, it's wider'n you think for; besides, ef he got stuck
into the middle of that thar curn't, how's he to get to the shore?
an him without any oars? Answer me that. No, sir; the boat
that'll drift down Petticoat Jack into the bay, without gettin
ashore, 'll drift up them straits into Minas jest the same."
"Well, there does seem something in that. I didn't think of his
drifting down the Petitcodiac."
"Somethin? Bless your heart! ain't that everythin?"
"But do you think there's really a chance yet?"
"A chance? Course thar is. While thar's life thar's hope."
"But how could he live so long?"
"Why shouldn't he?"
"He might starve."
"Not he. Didn't he carry off my box o' biscuit?"
"Think of this fog."
"O, fog ain't much. It's snow an cold that tries a man. He's
tough, too."
"But he's been so exposed."
"Exposed? What to? Not he. Didn't he go an carry off that ole
sail?"
"I cannot help thinking that it's all over with him?"
"Don't give him up; keep up; cheer up. Think how we got hold of
ole Solomon after givin him up. I tell you that thar was a good
sign."
"He's been gone too long. Why, it's going on a fortnight?"
"Wal, what o' that ef he's goin to turn up all right in the end? I
tell you he's somewhar. Ef he ain't in the Bay of Fundy, he may be
driftin off the coast o' Maine, an picked up long ago, an on his
way home now per steamer."
Bart shook his head, and turned away in deep despondency, in which
feeling all the other boys joined him. They had but little hope
now. The time that had elapsed seemed to be too long, and their
disappointments had been too many. The sadness which they had felt
all along was now deeper than ever, and they looked forward without
a ray of hope.
On Friday evening they landed at Scott's Bay, and, as old Bennie
Griggs's house was nearest, they went there. They found both the
old people at home, and were received with an outburst of welcome.
Captain Corbet was an old acquaintance, and made himself at home at
once. Soon his errand was announced.
Bennie had the usual answer, and that was, that nothing whatever
had been heard of any drifting boat. But he listened with intense
interest to Captain Corbet's story, and made him tell it over and
over again, down to the smallest particular. He also questioned
all the boys very closely.
After the questioning was over, he sat in silence for a long time.
At last he looked keenly at Captain Corbet.
"He's not ben heard tell of for about twelve days?"
"No."
"An it's ben ony moderate weather?"
"Ony moderate, but foggy."
"O, of course. Wal, in my 'pinion, fust an foremust, he ain't
likely to hev gone down."
"That thar's jest what I say."
"An he had them biscuit?"
"Yes--a hull box."
"An the sail for shelter?"
"Yes."
"Wal; it's queer. He can't hev got down by the State o' Maine;
for, ef he'd got thar, he'd hev sent word home before this."
"Course he would."
Old Bennie thought over this for a long time again, and the boys
watched him closely, as though some result of vital importance hung
upon his final decision.
"Wal," said Bennie at last, "s'posin that he's alive,--an it's very
likely,--thar's ony two ways to account for his onnat'ral silence.
Them air these:--
"Fust, he may hev got picked up by a timber ship, outward bound to
the old country. In that case he may be carried the hull way
acrost. I've knowed one or two sech cases, an hev heerd of
severial more.
"Second. He may hev drifted onto a oninhabited island."
"An oninhabited island?" repeated Captain Corbet.
"Yea."
"Wal," said Captain Corbet; after a pause, "I've knowed things
stranger than that."
"So hev I."
"Air thar any isle of the ocean in particular that you happen to
hev in your mind's eye now?"
"Thar air."
"Which?"
"Ile Haute."
"Wal, now, railly, I declar--ef I wan't thinkin o' that very spot
myself. An I war thinkin, as I war a comin up the bay, that that
thar isle of the ocean was about the only spot belongin to this
here bay that hadn't been heerd from. An it ain't onlikely that
them shores could a tale onfold that mought astonish some on us.
I shouldn't wonder a mite."
"Nor me," said Bennie, gravely.
"It's either a timber ship, or a desert island, as you say,--that's
sartin," said Captain Corbet, after further thought, speaking with
strong emphasis. "Thar ain't a mite o' doubt about it; an which o'
them it is air a very even question. For my part, I'd as soon bet
on one as t'other."
"I've heerd tell o' several seafarin men that's got adrift, an lit
on that thar isle," said Bennie, solemnly.
"Wal, so hev I; an though our lad went all the way from Petticoat
Jack, yet the currents in thar wandorins to an fro could
effectooate that thar pooty mighty quick, an in the course of two
or three days it could land him high an dry on them thar
sequestrated shores."
"Do you think there is any chance of it?" asked Bruce, eagerly,
directing his question to Bennie.
"Do I think? Why, sartin," said Bennie, regarding Bruce's anxious
face with a calm smile. "Hain't I ben a expoundin to you the
actool facts?"
"Well, then," cried Bart, starting to his feet, "let's go at once."
"Let's what?" asked Captain Corbet.
"Why, hurry off at once, and get to him as soon as we can."
"An pray, young sir, how could we get to him by leavin here jest
now?"
"Can't we go straight to Ile Haute?"
"Scacely. The tide'll be agin us, an the wind too, till nigh
eleven."
Bart gave a deep sigh.
"But don't be alarmed. We'll go thar next, an as soon as we can.
You see we've got to go on into Minas Basin. Now we want to leave
here so as to drop down with the tide, an then drop up with the
flood tide into Minas Bay. I've about concluded to wait here till
about three in the mornin. We'll drop down to the island in about
a couple of hours, and'll hev time to run ashore, look round, and
catch the flood tide."
"Well, you know best," said Bart, sadly.
"I think that's the only true an rational idee," said Bennie. "I
do, railly; an meantime you can all get beds here with me, an you
can hev a good bit o' sleep before startin."
This conversation took place not long after their arrival. The
company were sitting in the big old kitchen, and Mrs. Bennie was
spreading her most generous repast on the table.
After a bounteous supper the two old men talked over the situation
until bedtime. They told many stories about drifting boats and
rafts, compared notes about the direction of certain currents, and
argued about the best course to pursue under certain very difficult
circumstances, such, for example, as a thick snow-storm, midnight,
a heavy sea, and a strong current setting upon a lee shore, the
ship's anchor being broken also. It was generally considered that
the situation was likely to be unpleasant.
At ten o'clock Bennie hurried his guests to their beds, where they
slept soundly in spite of their anxiety. Before three in the
morning he awaked them, and they were soon ready to reembark.
It was dim morning twilight as they bade adieu to their hospitable
entertainers, and but little could be seen. Captain Corbet raised
his head, and peered into the sky above, and sniffed the sea air.
"Wal, railly," said he, "I do declar ef it don't railly seem as ef
it railly is a change o' weather--it railly doos. Why, ain't this
rich? We're ben favored at last. We're agoin to hev a clar day.
Hooray!"
The boys could not make out whether the captain's words were
justified or not by the facts, but thought that they detected in
the air rather the fragrance of the land than the savor of the salt
sea. There was no wind, however, and they could not see far enough
out on the water to know whether there was any fog or not.
Bennie accompanied them to the boat, and urged them to come back if
they found the boys and let him rest in Scott's Bay. But the fate
of that boy was so uncertain, that they could not make any promise
about it.
It was a little after three when the Antelope weighed anchor, and
dropped down the bay.
There was no wind whatever. It was the tide only that carried them
down to their destination. Soon it began to grow lighter, and by
the time that they were half way, they saw before them the dark
outline of the island, as it rose from the black water with its
frowning cliffs.
The boys looked at it in silence. It seemed, indeed, a hopeless
place to search in for signs of poor Tom. How could he ever get
ashore in such a place as this, so far out of the line of his
drift; or if he had gone ashore there, how could he have lived till
now? Such were the gloomy and despondent thoughts that filled the
minds of all, as they saw the vessel drawing nearer and still
nearer to those frowning cliffs.
As they went on the wind grew stronger, and they found that it was
their old friend--the sou-wester. The light increased, and they
saw a fog cloud on the horizon, a little beyond Ile Haute. Captain
Corbet would not acknowledge that he had been mistaken in his
impressions about a change of weather, but assured the boys that
this was only the last gasp of the sou-wester, and that a change
was bound to take place before evening. But though the fog was
visible below Ile Haute, it did not seem to come any nearer, and at
length the schooner approached the island, and dropped anchor.
It was about half past four in the morning, and the light of day
was beginning to be diffused around, when they reached their
destination. As it was low tide, they could not approach very
near, but kept well off the precipitous shores on the south side of
the island. In the course of her drift, while letting go the
anchor, she went off to a point about half way down, opposite the
shore. Scarce had her anchor touched bottom, than the impatient
boys were all in the boat, calling on Captain Corbet to come along.
The captain and Wade took the oars.
It was a long pull to the shore, and, when they reached it, the
tide was so low that there remained a long walk over the beach.
They had landed about half way down the island, and, as they
directed their steps to the open ground at the east end, they had a
much greater distance to traverse than they had anticipated. As
they walked on, they did not speak a word. But already they began
to doubt whether there was any hope left. They had been bitterly
disappointed as they came near and saw no sign of life. They had
half expected to see some figure on the beach waiting to receive
them. But there was no figure and no shout of joy.
At length, as they drew nearer to the east end, and the light grew
brighter, Bart, who was in advance, gave a shout.
They all hurried forward.
Bart was pointing towards something.
It was a signal-staff, with something that looked like a flag
hoisted half mast high.
Every heart beat faster, and at once the wildest hopes arose. They
hurried on over the rough beach as fast as possible. They
clambered over rocks, and sea-weed, and drift-wood, and at length
reached the bank. And still, as they drew nearer, the signal-staff
rose before them, and the flag at half mast became more and more
visible.
Rushing up the bank towards this place, each trying to outstrip the
others, they hurried forward, full of hope now that some signs of
Tom might be here. At length they reached the place where Tom had
been so long, and here their steps were arrested by the scene
before them.
On the point arose the signal-staff, with its heavy flag hanging
down. The wind was now blowing, but it needed almost a gale to
hold out that cumbrous canvas. Close by were the smouldering
remains of what had been a huge fire, and all around this were
chips and sticks. In the immediate neighborhood were some bark
dishes, in some of which were shrimps and mussels. Clams and
lobsters lay around, with shells of both.
Not far off was a canvas tent, which looked singularly comfortable
and cosy.
Captain Corbet looked at all this, and shook his head.
"Bad--bad--bad," he murmured, in a doleful tone. "My last hope,
or, rayther, one of my last hopes, dies away inside of me. This is
wuss than findin' a desert place."
"Why? Hasn't he been here? He must have been here," cried Bart.
"These are his marks. I dare say he's here now--perhaps asleep--in
the camp. I'll go--"
"Don't go--don't--you needn't," said Captain Corbet, with a groan.
"You don't understand. It's ben no pore castaway that's come here--
no pore driftin lad that fell upon these lone and desolate coasts.
No--never did he set foot here. All this is not the work o'
shipwracked people. It's some festive picnickers, engaged in
whilin away a few pleasant summer days. All around you may
perceive the signs of luxoorious feastin. Here you may see all the
different kind o' shellfish that the sea produces. Yonder is a
luxoorious camp. But don't mind what I say. Go an call the
occoopant, an satisfy yourselves."
Captain Corbet walked with the boys over to the tent. His words
had thrown a fresh dejection over all. They felt the truth of what
he said. These remains spoke not of shipwreck, but of pleasure,
and of picnicking. It now only remained to rouse the slumbering
owner of the tent, and put the usual questions.
Bart was there first, and tapped at the post.
No answer.
He tapped again.
Still there was no answer.
He raised the canvas and looked in. He saw the mossy interior, but
perceived that it was empty. All the others looked in. On
learning this they turned away puzzled.
"Wal, I thought so," said Captain Corbet. "They jest come an go as
the fancy takes 'em. They're off on Cape d'Or to-day, an back here
to-morrer."
As he said this he seated himself near the tent, and the boys
looked around with sad and sombre faces.
It was now about half past five, and the day had dawned for some
time. In the east the fog had lifted, and the sun was shining
brightly.
"I told you thar'd be a change, boys," said the captain.
As he spoke there came a long succession of sharp, shrill blasts
from the fog horn of the Antelope, which started every one, and
made them run to the rising ground to find out the cause.
XXII.
Astounding Discovery.--The whole Party of Explorers overwhelmed.--
Meeting with the Lost.--Captain Corbet improves the Occasion.--
Conclusion.
At the sound from the Antelope they had all started for the rising
ground, to see what it might mean. None of them had any idea what
might be the cause, but all of them felt startled and excited at
hearing it under such peculiar circumstances. Nor was their
excitement lessened by the sight that met their eyes as they
reached the rising ground and looked towards the schooner.
A change had taken place. When they had left, Solomon only had
remained behind. But now there were two figures on the deck. One
was amidships. The schooner was too far away for them to see
distinctly, but this one was undoubtedly Solomon; yet his gestures
were so extraordinary that it was difficult to identify him. He it
was by whom the blasts on the fog horn were produced. Standing
amidships, he held the fog horn in one hand, and in the other he
held a battered old cap which supplied the place of the old straw
hat lost at Quaco. After letting off a series of blasts from the
horn, he brandished his cap wildly in the air, and then proceeded
to dance a sort of complex double-shuffle, diversified by wild
leaps in the air, and accompanied by brandishings of his hat and
fresh blasts of the horn. But if Solomon's appearance was somewhat
bewildering, still more so was that of the other one. This one
stood astern. Suddenly as they looked they saw him hoist a flag,
and, wonder of wonders, a black flag,--no other, in short, than the
well-known flag of the "B. O. W. C." That flag had been mournfully
lowered and put away on Tom's disappearance, but now it was hoisted
once more; and as they looked, the new comer hoisted it and lowered
it, causing it to rise and fall rapidly before their eyes.
Nor did the wonder end here. They had taken away the only boat
that the schooner possessed in order to come ashore, leaving
Solomon alone. They had noticed no boat whatever as they rowed to
land. But now they saw a boat floating astern of the Antelope,
with a small and peculiarly shaped sail, that now was flapping in
the breeze. Evidently this boat belonged to the new comer. But
who was he? How had he come there? What was the meaning of those
signals with that peculiar flag, and what could be the reason of
Solomon's joy?
They stood dumb with astonishment, confused, and almost afraid to
think of the one cause that each one felt to be the real
explanation of all this. Too long had they searched in vain for
Tom,--too often had they sunk from hope to despair,--too confident
and sanguine had they been; and now, at this unexpected sight, in
spite of the assurance which it must have given them that this
could be no other than Tom, they scarce dared to believe in such
great happiness, and were afraid that even this might end in a
disappointment like the others.
But, though they stood motionless and mute, the two figures on
board the Antelope were neither one nor the other. Solomon danced
more and more madly, and brandished his arms more and more
excitedly, and there came forth from his fog horn wilder and still
wilder peals, and the flag rose and fell more and more quickly,
until at last the spectators on the shore could resist no longer.
"G-o-o-o-o-o-o-o-o-d ger-ra-a-a-cious!"
This cry burst from Captain Corbet.
It was enough. The spell was broken. A wild cry burst forth from
the boys, and with loud, long shouts of joy they rushed down the
bank, and over the beach, back to their boat. The captain was as
quick as any of them. In his enthusiasm he forgot his rheumatism.
There was a race, and though he was not even with Bruce and Bart,
he kept ahead of Pat, and Arthur, and Phil, and old Wade.
Hurrah!
And hurrah again!
Yes, and hurrah over and over; and many were the hurrahs that burst
from them as they raced over the rocky beach.
Then to tumble into the boat, one after another, to grasp the oars,
to push her off, to head her for the schooner, and to dash through
the water on their way back, was but the work of a few minutes.
The row to the schooner was a tedious one to those impatient young
hearts. But as they drew nearer, they feasted their eyes on the
figure of the new comer, and the last particle of doubt and fear
died away. First, they recognized the dress--the familiar red
shirt. Tom had worn a coat and waistcoat ashore at Hillsborough on
that eventful day; but on reaching the schooner, he had flung them
off, and appeared now in the costume of the "B. O. W. C." This
they recognized first, and then his face was revealed--a face that
bore no particular indication of suffering or privation, which
seemed certainly more sunburnt than formerly, but no thinner.
Soon they reached the vessel, and clambered up; and then with what
shouts and almost shrieks of joy they seized Tom! With what cries
and cheers of delight they welcomed him back again, by turns
overwhelming him with questions, and then pouring forth a torrent
of description of their own long search!
Captain Corbet stood a little aloof. His face was not so radiant
as the faces of the boys. His features were twitching, and his
hands were clasped tight behind his back. He stood leaning against
the mainmast, his eyes fixed on Tom. It was thus that he stood
when Tom caught sight of him, and rushed up to shake hands.
Captain Corbet grasped Tom's hand in both of his. He trembled, and
Tom felt that his hands were cold and clammy.
"My dear boys," he faltered, "let us rejice--and--be glad--for this
my son--that was dead--is alive agin--"
A shudder passed through him, and he stopped, and pressed Tom's
hand convulsively.
Then he gave a great gasp, and, "Thar, thar," he murmured, "it's
too much! I'm onmanned. I've suffered--an agonized--an this--
air--too much!"
And with these words he burst into tears.
Then he dropped Tom's hand, and retreated into the cabin, where he
remained for a long time, but at last reappeared, restored to
calmness, and with a smile of sweet and inexpressible peace
wreathing his venerable countenance.
By this time the boys had told Tom all about their long search; and
when Captain Corbet reappeared, Tom had completed the story of his
adventures, and had just reached that part, in his wanderings,
where he had left the island, and found himself drifting down the
bay. As that was the point at which Tom was last lost sight of in
these pages, his story may be given here in his own words.
"Yes," said he, "you see I found myself drifting down. There was
no help for it. The wind was slight, and the tide was strong. I
was swept down into a fog bank, and lost sight of Ile Haute
altogether. Well, it didn't matter very much, and I wasn't a bit
anxious. I knew that the tide would turn soon, and then I'd come
up, and fetch the land somewhere; so I waited patiently. At last,
after about--well, nearly an hour, the tide must have turned, and I
drifted back, and there was wind enough to give me quite a lift;
and so all of a sudden I shot out of the fog, and saw Ile Haute
before me. I was coming in such a way that my course lay on the
south side of the island, and in a short time I came in sight of
the schooner. I tell you what it is, I nearly went into fits--I
knew her at once. A little farther on, and I saw you all cutting
like mad over the beach to my camp. I was going to put after you
at first; but the fact is, I hated the island so that I couldn't
bear to touch it again, and so I concluded I'd go on board and
signal. So I came up alongside, and got on board. Solomon was
down below; so I just stepped forward, and put my head over the
hatchway, and spoke to him. I declare I thought he'd explode. He
didn't think I was a ghost at all. It wasn't fear, you know--it
was nothing but delight, and all that sort of thing, you know.
Well, you know, then we went to work signaling to you, and he took
the fog horn, and I went to the flag, and so it was."
"I don't know how we happened not to see your boat," said Bruce.
"O, that's easy enough to account for," said Tom. "I was hid by
the east point of the island. I didn't see the schooner till I got
round, and you must have been just getting ashore at that time."
During all this time Solomon had been wandering about in a
mysterious manner; now diving below into the hold, and rattling the
pots and pans; again emerging upon deck, and standing to listen to
Tom and look at him. His face shone like a polished boot; there
was a grin on his face that showed every tooth in his head, and his
little twinkling black beads of eyes shone, and sparkled, and
rolled about till the winking black pupils were eclipsed by the
whites. At times he would stand still, and whisper solemnly and
mysteriously to himself, and then, without a moment's warning, he
would bring his hands down on his thighs, and burst into a loud,
long, obstreperous, and deafening peal of uncontrollable laughter.
"Solomon," said Tom, at last, "Solomon, my son, won't you burst if
you go on so? I'm afraid you may."
At this Solomon went off again, and dived into the hold. But in a
minute or two he was back again, and giggling, and glancing, and
whispering to himself, as before. Solomon and Captain Corbet thus
had each a different way of exhibiting the same emotion, for the
feeling that was thus variously displayed was nothing but the
purest and most unfeigned joy.
"See yah, Mas'r Tom--and chil'n all," said Solomon, at last. "Ise
gwine to pose dat we all go an tend to sometin ob de fust portance.
Hyah's Mas'r Tom habn't had notin to eat more'n a mont; an hyah's
de res ob de blubbed breddern ob de Bee see double what been a
fastin since dey riz at free clock dis shinin and spicious morn.
Dis yah's great an shinin casium, an should be honnad by great and
strorny stivities. Now, dar ain't no stivity dat can begin to hole
a can'l to a good dinna, or suppa, or sometin in de eatin line. So
Ise gwine to pose to honna de cobbery ob de Probable Son by a rale
ole-fashioned, stunnin breakfuss. Don't be fraid dar'll be any
ficiency hyah. I got tings aboard dat I ben a savin for dis
spicious an lightful cobbery. Ben no eatin in dis vessel ebber
sence de loss chile took his parter an drifted off. Couldn't get
no pusson to tetch nuffin. Got 'em all now; an so, blubbed
breddern, let's sem'l once more, an ole Solomon'll now ficiate in
de pressive pacity ob Gran Pandledrum. An I pose dat we rect a
tent on de sho oh dis yah island, and hab de banket come off in
fust chop style."
"The island!" cried Tom, in horror. "What! the island? Breakfast
on the island? What a horrible proposal! Look here, captain.
Can't we get away from this?"
"Get away from this?" repeated the captain, in mild surprise.
"Yes," said Tom. "You see, the fact is, when a fellow's gone
through what I have, he isn't over fond of the place where he's had
that to go through. And so this island is a horrible place to me,
and I can't feel comfortable till I get away out of sight of it.
Breakfast! Why, the very thought of eating is abominable as long
as that island is in sight."
"Wal, railly, now," said Captain Corbet, "I shouldn't wonder if
thar was a good deal in that, though I didn't think of it afore.
Course it's natral you shouldn't be over fond of sech, when you've
had sech an oncommon tough time. An now, bein' as thar's no uthly
occasion for the Antelope to be a lingerin' round this here isle of
the ocean, I muve that we histe anchor an resume our vyge. It's
nigh onto a fortnight sence we fust started for Petticoat Jack, and
sence that time we've had rare and strikin vycissitoods. It may
jest happen that some on ye may be tired of the briny deep, an may
wish no more to see the billers bound and scatter their foamin
spray; some on ye likewise may be out o' sperrits about the fog.
In sech a case, all I got to say is, that this here schooner'll be
very happy to land you at the nighest port, Scott's Bay, frincense,
from which you may work your way by land to your desired haven.
Sorry would I be to part with ye, specially in this here moment of
jy; but ef ye've got tired of the Antelope, tain't no more'n's
natral. Wal, now,--what d'ye say--shall we go up to Scott's Bay,
or will ye contenoo on to Petticoat Jack, an accomplitch the
riginal vyge as per charter party?"
The boys said nothing, but looked at Tom as though referring the
question to him.
"As far as I am concerned," said Tom, who noticed this reference to
him, "it's a matter of indifference where we go, so long as we go
out of sight of this island. If the rest prefer landing at Scott's
Bay, I'm agreed; at the same time, I'd just as soon go on to
Petitcodiac."
"An what do the rest o' ye say?" asked the captain, somewhat
anxiously.
"For my part," said Bruce, "I think it's about the best thing we
can do."
The others all expressed similar sentiments, and Captain Corbet
listened to this with evident delight.
"All right," said he, "and hooray! Solomon, my aged friend, we
will have our breakfast on board, as we glide past them thar
historic shores. Pile on what you have, and make haste."
In a few minutes more the anchor was up, and the Antelope was under
way.
In about half an hour Solomon summoned them below, where he laid
before them a breakfast that cast into the shade Tom's most
elaborate meal on the island. With appetites that seemed to have
been growing during the whole period of Tom's absence, the joyous
company sat down to that repast, while Solomon moved around, his
eyes glistening, his face shining, his teeth grinning, and his hips
moving, as, after his fashion, he whispered little Solomonian
pleasantries to his own affectionate heart. At this repast the
boys began a fresh series of questions, and drew from Tom a full,
complete, and exhaustive history of his island life, more
particularly with regard to his experience in house-building, and
housekeeping; and with each one, without exception, it was a matter
of sincere regret that it had not been his lot to be Tom's
companion in the boat and on the island.
After breakfast they came up on deck. The wind had at length
changed, as Captain Corbet had prophesied in the morning, and the
sky overhead was clear. Down the bay still might be seen the fog
banks, but near at hand all was bright. Behind them Ile Haute was
already at a respectful distance, and Cape Chignecto was near.
"My Christian friends," said Captain Corbet, solemnly,--"my
Christian friends, an dear boys. Agin we resoom the thread of our
eventfool vyge, that was brok of a suddent in so onparld a manner.
Agin we gullide o'er the foamin biller like a arrer shot from a
cross-bow, an culleave the briny main. We have lived, an we have
suffered, but now our sufferins seem to be over. At last we have a
fair wind, with a tide to favor us, an we'll be off Hillsborough
before daybreak to-morrer. An now I ask you all, young sirs, do
you feel any regretses over the eventfool past? I answer, no. An
wan't I right? Didn't I say that that thar lad would onst more
show his shinin face amongst us, right side up, with care, in good
order an condition, as when shipped on board the Antelope, Corbet
master, from Grand Pre, an bound for Petticoat Jack? Methinks I
did. Hence the vally of a lofty sperrit in the face of
difficulties. An now, young sirs, in after life take warnin by
this here vyge. Never say die. Don't give up the ship. No
surrender. England expects every man to do his dooty. For him
that rises superior to succumstances is terewly great; an by
presarvin a magnanumous mind you'll be able to hold up your heads
and smile amid the kerrash of misfortin. Now look at me. I affum,
solemn, that all the sufferins I've suffered have ben for my good;
an so this here vyge has eventooated one of the luckiest vyges that
you've ever had. An thus," he concluded, stretching out his
venerable hands with the air of one giving a benediction,--"thus
may it be with the vyge of life. May all its storms end in calms,
an funnish matter in the footoor for balmy rettuspect. Amen!"
It was a close approach to a sermon; and though the words were a
little incoherent, yet the tone was solemn, and the intention good.
After this the captain dropped the lofty part of a Mentor, and
mingled with the boys as an equal.
This time the voyage passed without any accident. Before daybreak
on the following morning they reached Hillsborough, where Mrs.
Watson received them with the utmost joy. In a few days more the
boys had scattered, and Bart arrived home with the story of Tom's
rescue.
End of the Project Gutenberg Etext of Lost in the Fog, by James De Mille